Teledyne Photo Scanner 703E User Manual

OPERATOR’S MANUAL  
MODEL 703E  
PHOTOMETRIC O3 CALIBRATOR  
© TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS  
ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION DIVISION  
(TAPI)  
9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE  
SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA 92121-5201  
USA  
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190  
Phone: 858-657-9800  
Fax: 858-657-9816  
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/  
05743 Rev. C  
DCN 5521  
29 July 2009  
Copyright 2007  
Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED.  
We recommend that this document be read in its entirety before any attempt is  
made to operate the instrument.  
DOCUMENTS  
Document P/N  
05743  
Revision  
DCN  
5359  
5359  
5359  
5359  
5359  
5359  
5359  
5359  
Nomenclature  
M703, Manual, Instruction - Title  
M703, Manual, Instruction - Text  
M703, Appendix A, Menu Tree  
M703, Appendix B, Spare Parts  
M703, Appendix C, Repair Form  
M703, Appendix D, Schematics  
List, Spare Parts, M703  
Dated  
B
B
C
B
B
B
F
B
03/20/09  
03/20/09  
03/20/09  
03/20/09  
03/20/09  
03/20/09  
03/20/09  
03/20/09  
05744  
05745  
05746  
05747  
05748  
05834  
05863  
List, Recommended Spares Stocking Levels,  
M703  
05834  
05863  
J
5480  
5480  
List, Spare Parts, M703  
07/15/09  
07/15/09  
D
List, Recommended Spares Stocking Levels,  
M703  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Safety Messages  
SAFETY MESSAGES  
Your safety and the safety of others are very important. We have provided many important safety messages in  
this manual. Please read these messages carefully.  
A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Each safety message is  
associated with a safety alert symbol. These symbols are found in the manual and inside the M703E  
Photometric O3 Calibrator. The definition of these symbols is described below:  
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD: Refer to the instructions for details on the specific  
hazard.  
CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning.  
CAUTION: Electrical Shock Hazard.  
TECHNICIAN SYMBOL: All operations marked with this symbol are to be  
performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.  
CAUTION  
The M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described  
in this manual. If you use the M703E in a manner other than that for which it was intended,  
unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences.  
NOTE  
Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the  
M703E or any other Teledyne Instruments product  
can be obtained by:  
Contacting Teledyne Instruments’ Customer Service Department at 800-324-5190  
or  
05744 Rev B  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Safety Messages  
M703E Dynamic Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES:  
ii  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Table of Contents  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
3.4.5. Operating Modes for the O3 Generator..................................................................................................25  
05744 Rev B  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Table of Contents  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.11.1. Set up for Operating the M703E as an O3 Photometer .......................................................................77  
iv  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Table of Contents  
8.1. Verifying and Calibrating the M703E’s O3 Photometer............................................................................. 113  
8.1.1. Setup for VERIFYING AND calibrating the O3 Photometer................................................................ 113  
8.1.2. Verifying O3 Photometer Performance ............................................................................................... 115  
8.1.4. O3 Photometer Dark Calibration ......................................................................................................... 118  
8.2. Calibrating the O3 Generator .................................................................................................................... 119  
8.2.2. Viewing O3 Generator Calibration Points............................................................................................ 120  
8.2.3. Adding or Editing O3 Generator Calibration Points............................................................................. 121  
8.2.5. Turning O3 Generator Calibration Points ON / OFF ........................................................................... 123  
8.2.6. Performing an Automatic Calibration of the O3 Generator ................................................................. 124  
05744 Rev B  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Table of Contents  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
9.5. O3 generator operation............................................................................................................................. 151  
9.5.1. Principle of Photolytic O3 Generation ................................................................................................. 151  
9.5.3. O3 Generator Electronic Operation ..................................................................................................... 152  
9.6.4.1. O3 Photometer Temperature Control .......................................................................................... 160  
9.6.4.2. Pneumatic Sensors for the O3 Photometer ................................................................................. 161  
11.3.2.1. I2C Bus Watchdog Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 184  
11.3.2.2. O3 Status LEDs ......................................................................................................................... 185  
vi  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Table of Contents  
11.5. Troubleshooting the O3 photometer........................................................................................................ 197  
11.5.1. Dynamic Problems with the O3 photometer...................................................................................... 197  
11.5.1.1. Noisy or Unstable O3 Readings at Zero .................................................................................... 197  
11.5.1.2. Noisy, Unstable, or Non-Linear Span O3 Readings .................................................................. 198  
11.6. Troubleshooting the O3 Generator.......................................................................................................... 200  
11.7. Trouble Shooting the Optional O3 generator .......................................................................................... 201  
05744 Rev B  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Table of Contents  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
LIST OF FIGURES  
Figure 6-4: Set up for Using the M703E to Measure an External O3 Source ......................................................77  
Figure 8-4: O3 Generator Pressure Monitor Point Physical Location– M703E................................................. 126  
Figure 9-13: O3 Generator Internal Pneumatics.................................................................................................. 151  
Figure 9-14: O3 Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations ............................................................................. 152  
Figure 9-15: O3 Generator Electronic Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 153  
Figure 9-16: O3 Generator Electronic Components Location ............................................................................. 153  
Figure 9-17: O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations................................................. 154  
Figure 9-18: O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Measure Cycle.................................................................................... 157  
Figure 9-20: O3 Photometer Absorption Path ..................................................................................................... 158  
Figure 9-22: O3 Photometer Electronic Block Diagram....................................................................................... 160  
viii  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Table of Contents  
Figure 10-4: O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations................................................. 174  
LIST OF TABLES  
M703E Specifications for O3 Photometer ............................................................................................6  
05744 Rev B  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Table of Contents  
LIST OF APPENDICES  
APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION  
APPENDIX A-1: Model 703E Software Menu Trees, Revision C.0  
APPENDIX A-2: Model 703E Setup Variables Available Via Serial I/O, Revision C.0  
APPENDIX A-3: Model 703E Warnings and Test Measurements via Serial I/O, Revision C.0  
APPENDIX A-4: Model 703E Signal I/O Definitions, Revision C.0  
APPENDIX A-5: Model 703E Terminal Command Designators, Revision C.0  
APPENDIX B - Model 703E SPARE PARTS LIST  
APPENDIX C - Model 703E REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE  
APPENDIX D - Model 703E ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS  
USER NOTES:  
05744 Rev B  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Table of Contents  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES:  
xii  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
SECTION I  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
05744 Rev B  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES  
2
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Introduction  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
1. INTRODUCTION  
1.1. M703E CALIBRATOR OVERVIEW  
The Model 703E is a microprocessor-based ozone calibrator for calibration of ambient ozone analyzers, such as  
the T-API M400E. The M703E features an internal ozone photometer that provides very accurate closed loop  
feedback control of the ozone concentration.  
As many as 50 independent calibration sequences may be programmed into the M703E, covering time periods  
of up to one year. The setup of sequences is simple and intuitive. These sequences may be actuated manually,  
automatically, or by a remote signal. The sequences may be uploaded remotely, including remote editing. All  
programs are maintained in non-volatile memory.  
The M703E design emphasizes fast response, repeatability, overall accuracy and ease of operation. It may be  
combined with the Model 701 Zero Air Generator to provide the ultimate in easy to use, precise calibration for  
your ozone analyzers.  
Some of the exceptional features of your M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator are:  
Advanced E Series electronics  
Lightweight for transportability  
Optional Ethernet connectivity  
12 independent timers for sequences  
Nested sequences (up to 5 levels)  
Internal ozone generator and photometer allows use as primary or transfer standard  
1.2. USING THIS MANUAL  
NOTE  
Throughout this manual, words printed in capital, bold letters, such as SETUP or ENTR represent  
messages as they appear on the calibrator’s display.  
This manual is organized in the following manner:  
TABLE OF CONTENTS:  
Outlines the contents of the manual in the order the information is presented. This is a good overview of the  
topics covered in the manual. There is also a list of appendices, figures and tables. In the electronic version of  
the manual, clicking on any of these table entries automatically views that section.  
SECTION I – GENERAL INFORMATION  
INTRODUCTION  
A brief description of the M703E calibrator architecture as well as a description of the layout of the  
manual and what information is located in its various sections and chapters.  
SPECIFICATIONS AND WARRANTY  
Teledyne Instruments’ warranty statement.  
05744 Rev B  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Introduction  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
GETTING STARTED  
Instructions for setting up, installing and running your calibrator for the first time.  
GLOSSARY:  
Answers to the most frequently asked questions about operating the calibrator and a glossary of  
acronyms and technical terms.  
OPTIONAL HARDWARE & SOFTWARE  
A description of optional equipment to add functionality to your calibrator.  
SECTION II – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
USING THE M703E CALIBRATOR  
Step-by-Step instructions for using the display/keyboard to set up and operate the M703E calibrator.  
REMOTE OPERATION OF THE M703E CALIBRATOR  
Information and instructions for interacting with the M703E calibrator via its several remote interface  
options (e.g. via RS-232, Ethernet, its built in digital control inputs/outputs, etc.)  
M703E VALIDATION AND VERIFICATION  
Methods and procedures for validating and verifying the correct operation of your M703E Photometric O3  
Calibrator  
SECTION III – TECHNICAL INFORMATION  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
An in-depth look at the various principals by which your calibrator operates as well as a description of  
how the various electronic, mechanical and pneumatic components of the calibrator work and interact  
with each other. A close reading of this section is invaluable for understanding the calibrator’s  
operation.  
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE AND PROCEDURES  
Description of preventative maintenance procedures that should be regularly performed on you  
calibrator to assure good operating condition.  
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR OF THE M703E CALIBRATOR  
This section includes pointers and instructions for diagnosing problems with the calibrator in general as  
well as instructions on performing repairs.  
A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE  
This section describes how static electricity occurs; why it is a significant concern and; how to avoid it  
and avoid allowing ESD to affect the reliable and accurate operation of your calibrator.  
APPENDICES  
For easier access and better updating, some information has been separated out of the manual and placed in a  
series of appendices at the end of this manual. These include version-specific software menu trees, warning  
messages, serial I/O variables as well as spare part listings, repair questionnaires, interconnect drawing,  
detailed pneumatic and electronic schematics.  
USER NOTES:  
4
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty  
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS AND  
WARRANTY  
2.1. SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 2-1: M703E Analytical Specifications  
Linearity  
+/- 1.0% of full scale  
Precision  
1.0 ppb  
Stability  
+/- 2.0 ppb (photometer feedback mode)  
180 seconds to 95%  
Response Time  
Stability (7-days)  
1% photometer feedback; 3% without photometer feedback (CNST or REF)  
Table 2-2: M703E Electrical and Physical Specifications  
Temperature Range  
Humidity Range  
5-40ºC  
0 - 95% RH, non-condensing  
7” (178 mm) x 17” (432 mm) x 24” (609 mm)  
10,000 ft Maximum  
Dimensions (HxWxD)  
Operating Altitude  
35.5 lbs (16.1 kg) including internal zero air pump  
Weight  
115VAC, 60Hz  
AC Power  
230VAC,50HZ  
Analog Outputs  
1 user configurable output  
0.1 V, 1 V, 5 V or 10 V  
Range with 5% under/over-range  
Analog Output Ranges  
Analog Output Resolution  
Digital Control Outputs  
Digital Control Inputs  
Status Outputs  
1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage (12 bit)  
12 opto-isolated outputs  
12 opto-isolated outputs  
12 opto-isolated outputs, 5 defined, 7 spare  
2 ports: 1x RS-232; 1x RS-485 or RS-232 (configurable)  
Communication speed: 300 - 115200 baud (user selectable)  
Serial I/O  
EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15.107 Class  
A, ICES-003 Class A (ANSI C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548 (w/A1 & A2; 97)  
Class A.  
Certifications  
IEC 61010-1:90 + A1:92 + A2:95,  
05744 Rev B  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Table 2-3: M703E Specifications for Ozone Generator  
Maximum Output  
Minimum Output  
Response Time:  
Optical Feedback  
6 ppm LPM  
100 ppb LPM  
180 Sec. (98%)  
Standard  
Table 2-4: M703E Specifications for O3 Photometer  
Full Scale Range  
Precision  
100 ppb to 10 ppm ; User Selectable  
1.0 ppb  
Linearity  
1.0% of Full Scale  
Rise/Fall Time  
Zero Drift  
<20 sec (photometer response)  
<1.0 ppb / 7 days  
Span Drift  
<1% / 24 hours; <2% / 7 days  
800 cc3/min  
Minimum Gas Flow Required  
2.2. CE MARK COMPLIANCE  
EMISSIONS COMPLIANCE  
The Teledyne Instruments’ M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator is designed to be fully compliant with:  
EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15.107 Class A, ICES-003 Class A (ANSI  
C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548 (w/A1 & A2; 97) Class A.  
Test status: Pending.  
SAFETY COMPLIANCE  
The Teledyne Instruments’ M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator is designed to be fully compliant with:  
IEC 61010-1:90 + A1:92 + A2:95,  
Test status: Pending.  
6
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty  
2.3. WARRANTY  
WARRANTY POLICY (02024D)  
Prior to shipment, T-API equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment failure occur, T-API  
assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.  
COVERAGE  
After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, T-API stands ready to provide on-site or in-plant  
service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry. All maintenance and the first  
level of field troubleshooting is to be performed by the customer.  
NON-API MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT  
Equipment provided but not manufactured by T-API is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according  
to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturers warranty.  
GENERAL  
During the warranty period, T-API warrants each Product manufactured by T-API to be free from defects in  
material and workmanship under normal use and service. Expendable parts are excluded.  
If a Product fails to conform to its specifications within the warranty period, API shall correct such defect by, in  
API's discretion, repairing or replacing such defective Product or refunding the purchase price of such Product.  
The warranties set forth in this section shall be of no force or effect with respect to any Product: (i) that has been  
altered or subjected to misuse, negligence or accident, or (ii) that has been used in any manner other than in  
accordance with the instruction provided by T-API, or (iii) not properly maintained.  
THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION AND THE REMEDIES THEREFORE ARE EXCLUSIVE  
AND IN LIEU OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE OR OTHER WARRANTY OF QUALITY, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. THE REMEDIES  
SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION ARE THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY  
CONTAINED HEREIN. API SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OF T-API'S PERFORMANCE  
HEREUNDER, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
All units or components returned to Teledyne Instruments Incorporated should be properly packed for handling  
and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the repair, the equipment will be  
returned, freight prepaid.  
USER NOTES:  
05744 Rev B  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES:  
8
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3. GETTING STARTED  
3.1. UNPACKING AND INITIAL SETUP  
CAUTION  
THE M703E WEIGHS ABOUT 16.1 KG (35.5 POUNDS) WITHOUT OPTIONS  
INSTALLED. TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, WE RECOMMEND USING TWO  
PERSONS TO LIFT AND CARRY THE CALIBRATOR.  
1. Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage. If damaged, please advise the shipper  
first, then Teledyne Instruments.  
2. Included with your calibrator is a printed record of the final performance characterization performed on  
your instrument at the factory. This record, titled Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 05760) is an  
important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality  
records file for this instrument.  
3. Carefully remove the top cover of the calibrator and check for internal shipping damage.  
Remove the set-screw located in the top, center of the Front panel.  
Remove the 2 screws fastening the top cover to the unit (one per side towards the rear).  
Slide the cover backwards until it clears the calibrator’s front bezel.  
Lift the cover straight up.  
NOTE  
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by the  
human nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will  
void the instrument warranty.  
See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage.  
CAUTION  
NEVER DISCONNECT ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BOARDS, WIRING HARNESSES OR  
ELECTRONIC SUBASSEMBLIES WHILE THE UNIT IS UNDER POWER.  
4. Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good  
shape and properly seated.  
5. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to make sure they  
are firmly and properly seated.  
6. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed. These are checked on  
the paperwork accompanying the calibrator.  
05744 Rev B  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
VENTILATION CLEARANCE: Whether the calibrator is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack,  
be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance.  
AREA  
MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE  
10 cm / 4 inches  
Back of the instrument  
Sides of the instrument  
Above and below the instrument.  
2.5 cm / 1 inch  
2.5 cm / 1 inch  
Various rack mount kits are available for this calibrator. See Chapter 5 of this manual for more information.  
3.1.1. MODEL 703E CALIBRATOR  
LOCKING SCREW  
FASTENER  
FASTENER  
MESSAGE FIELD  
MODE FIELD  
KEYBOARD  
KEY DEFINITION FIELD  
ON / OFF SWITCH  
STATUS LED’s  
Figure 3-1:  
M703E Front Panel Layout  
Photometer  
O3 Inlet  
Photometer Gas  
Connectors  
O3 Outlet to  
Photometer  
O3 Generator  
Exhaust  
Optional Ethernet  
Card  
Status Outputs Control Outputs Analog Output  
FAN  
AC Power Cal Gas  
Connector Outlets  
Inlet for  
Dry Air  
Inlet for External  
Zero Air Source  
DCE-DTE COMM Ports  
Switch  
Control Inputs Serial No. Tag  
Figure 3-2:  
M703E Rear Panel Layout  
10  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Ethernet PCA  
AC Power  
Connector  
Gas Inlets & Outlets  
installed here  
(Optional)  
Photometer  
Pump  
Back Panel  
Motherboard  
CPU PCA  
Relay PCA  
O3 Generator &  
Photometer,  
Pressure/Flow  
Sensor PCA  
O3 Generator  
O3 Generator  
Assembly  
Dry Air  
Pump Inlet  
DC Power  
supplies  
Photometer  
M/R Valve  
Dry Air  
Pump  
Outlet  
O3 Generator  
Lamp Driver  
Dry Air  
Pump  
Outlet to O3  
Generator  
Check  
Valve  
Pressure  
Regulator  
Inlet  
1 LPM Flow  
Control Assy.  
Inlet to  
Regulator  
ON / OFF  
Switch  
Front Panel  
5 LPM  
Flow Control  
Assy.  
DFU Filters  
Charcoal  
Scrubber on  
Top  
Pressure  
Regulator  
Inlet  
Figure 3-3:  
M703E Internal Layout – Top View  
05744 Rev B  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Figure 3-4:  
M703E Pneumatic Diagram  
12  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
3.2.1. POWER CONNECTION  
Verify the correct line voltage and frequency configuration on the serial number tag on the rear panel of the  
M703E.  
Attach the power cord to the calibrator and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at  
your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground.  
CAUTION  
HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE CALIBRATORS CASE  
POWER CONNECTION MUST HAVE FUNCTIONING GROUND CONNECTION.  
DO NOT DEFEAT THE GROUND WIRE ON POWER PLUG.  
TURN OFF CALIBRATOR POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING OR  
CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SUBASSEMBLIES.  
CAUTION  
DO NOT LOOK AT THE PHOTOMETER UV LAMP.  
UV LIGHT CAN CAUSE EYE DAMAGE.  
ALWAYS WEAR GLASSES MADE FROM SAFETY UV FILTERING GLASS  
(PLASTIC GLASSES WILL NOT DO).  
3.2.2. ANALOG OUTPUT TEST CHANNEL CONNECTIONS  
The M703E is equipped with an analog output channel accessible through a connector on the back panel of the  
instrument. The standard configuration for this output is 0-5 VDC. It can be set by the user to output one of a  
variety of diagnostic test functions (see Section 6.9.)  
To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate analog output  
connections on the rear panel of the calibrator.  
Pin-outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are:  
ANALOG OUT  
+ –  
Figure 3-5:  
M703E the TEST CHANNEL Connector  
05744 Rev B  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.2.3. CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS  
The status outputs report calibrator conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors, which sink up to 50 mA of  
DC current. These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as  
programmable logic controllers (PLC’s). Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40  
VDC. All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D.  
NOTE  
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from an external  
device. When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, an external dropping resistor must be  
used to limit the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA, the transistor will  
drop approximately 1.2V from its collector to emitter.  
The status outputs are accessed via a 12-pin connector on the calibrator’s rear panel labeled STATUS. The  
function of each pin is defined in Table 3-1.  
STATUS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
+
Figure 3-6:  
The pin assignments for the Status Outputs are:  
Status Output Connector  
Table 3-1: Status Output Pin Assignments  
OUTPUT  
#
STATUS  
DEFINITION  
CONDITION  
1
SYSTEM OK  
Unassigned  
CAL ACTIVE  
DIAG  
On, if no faults are present.  
2
3
4
On if the calibrator is in GENERATE mode  
On if the calibrator is in DIAGNOSTIC mode  
On whenever a temperature alarm is active.  
5
TEMP ALARM  
6
PRESS ALARM  
Unassigned  
On whenever gas pressure alarm is active  
7 & 8  
D
Emitter BUSS  
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together.  
The ground level from the calibrator’s internal DC power supplies.  
Digital Ground  
D
+
Emitter BUSS  
DC POWER  
The emitters of the transistors on pins 9 to 16 are bussed together.  
+ 5 VDC  
14  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.2.4. CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS  
The calibrator is equipped with 12 digital control inputs that can be used to Initiate various user programmable  
calibration sequences (see Section 6.5.1.5 for instructions on assigning the control inputs to specific calibration  
sequences).  
Access to these inputs is via 2 separate 10-pin connectors, labeled CONTROL IN, that are located on the  
calibrator’s rear panel.  
Table 3-2: M703E Control Input Pin Assignments  
CONNECTOR  
Top  
INPUT  
1 to 6  
DESCRIPTION  
Can be used as either 6 separate on/off switches or as bits 1 through  
6 of a 12 bit wide binary activation code (see Section 6.5.1.5)  
Can be used as either 6 separate on/off switches or as bits 7 through  
12 of a 12 bit wide binary activation code (see Section 6.5.1.5)  
Bottom  
BOTH  
7 to 12  
Chassis ground.  
Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins A – F. This can be from  
an external source or from the “+” pin of the instruments STATUS  
connector.  
Top  
U
Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins G – L. This can be from  
an external source or from the “+” pin of the instruments STATUS  
connector.  
Bottom  
BOTH  
U
Internal source of +5V that can be used to actuate control inputs when  
connected to the U pin.  
+
05744 Rev B  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available from the pin labeled “+” is  
the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is required, an external 5 VDC power supply should be  
used.  
Example of Local Power Connections  
Example of External Power Connections  
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
+
7
8
9
10  
11 12  
U
+
7
8
9
10  
11 12  
U
+
5 VDC Power  
Supply  
+
-
Figure 3-7:  
M703E Digital Control Input Connectors  
16  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.2.5. CONNECTING THE CONTROL OUTPUTS  
The calibrator is equipped with 12 opto-isolated, digital control outputs. These outputs are activated by the  
M703E’s user-programmable, calibration sequences (see Section 6.5.1.6 for instructions on assigning the  
control outputs to specific calibration sequences)  
These outputs may be used to interface with devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable  
logic controllers (PLC’s), dataloggers, or digital relays/valve drivers.  
They are accessed via a 14-pin connector on the calibrator’s rear panel (see Figure 3-2).  
CONTROL OUTPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12  
E
Figure 3-8:  
M703E Digital Control Output Connector  
NOTE  
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current the input will draw. When connecting to a  
unit that does not have this feature, external resistors must be used to limit the current through the  
individual transistor outputs to 50mA (120 for 5V supply).  
The pin assignments for the control outputs are:  
Table 3-3: M703E Control Input Pin Assignments  
PIN #  
1 - 12  
E
STATUS DEFINITION  
Outputs 1 through 12 respectively  
Emitter BUSS  
CONDITION  
Closed if the sequence or sequence step activating output is operating  
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together.  
Digital Ground  
The ground level from the calibrator’s internal DC power supplies.  
05744 Rev B  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.2.6. CONNECTING THE SERIAL PORTS  
If you wish to utilize either of the calibrator’s two serial interface COMM ports, refer to Section 7.1 of this manual  
for instructions on their configuration and usage.  
3.2.7. CONNECTING TO A LAN OR THE INTERNET  
If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments Ethernet card (Option 63 and 64), plug one end into the 7’ CAT5 cable  
supplied with the option into the appropriate place on the back of the calibrator and the other end into any  
nearby Ethernet access port.  
NOTE:  
The M703E firmware supports dynamic IP addressing or DHCP.  
If your network also supports DHCP, the calibrator will automatically configure its LAN connection  
appropriately,  
If your network does not support DHCP, see Section 7.5.2.1 for instructions on manually configuring the  
LAN connection.  
3.2.8. CONNECTING TO A MULTIDROP NETWORK  
If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments RS-232 multidrop card (Option 62), see Section 7.3 for instructions on  
setting it up.  
18  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.3. PNENUMATIC CONNECTIONS  
Figure 3-9:  
Basic Pneumatic Setup of M703E  
3.3.1. DRY AIR IN  
When using the internal zero air pump, a source of dry air should be connected to the port labeled ‘Dry Air In’ on  
the rear panel. This air should be supplied at atmospheric pressure. The supplied air should have a dew point  
of –20 C or less.  
Teledyne API can supply an optional desiccant cartridge that can be used to supply dry air to the M703E.  
3.3.2. ZERO AIR IN  
An external pressurized source of zero air can be supplied at the ‘Zero Air” port on the rear panel. This is the  
standard configuration when the zero air pump is not installed. This zero air should be scrubbed of ozone and  
have a dew point of -20 C or less. The pressure of the zero air should be regulated to 20-35 psig.  
NOTE  
When connecting an external source of zero air to an M703E with an internal zero air pump installed, the  
zero air pump should be disabled.  
The “ZA_PUMP_ENABLE” VAR (see Section 6.10) should be set to OFF.  
05744 Rev B  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.3.3. OUTPUT MANIFOLD  
A four-port output manifold is supplied on the rear panel of the M703E enabling simultaneous testing of up to two  
external analyzers. Sample lines for ozone analyzers to be calibrated can be connected directly to this manifold.  
To prevent ozone exposure, the bottom port of this manifold is used as a vent and should be connected to a  
proper unpressurized vent manifold. It is important that the backpressure at this vent fitting be kept to a  
minimum. If a vent line longer than 2 meters (~6 feet) is required, then 3/8” OD tubing should be used.  
Any unused ports on this manifold must be capped.  
3.3.4. EXHAUST  
The port labeled ‘EXHAUST’ contains the exhaust gas from the internal photometer and may contain ozone.  
This port should be connected to a proper unpressurized vent manifold to prevent ozone exposure.  
3.3.5. MEASURING AN EXTERNAL OZONE SOURCE  
The M703E can easily be configured to measure an external source of ozone.  
See Section 6.11 for details on operating the M703E in this manner.  
USER NOTES  
20  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.4. INITIAL OPERATION  
If you are unfamiliar with the M703E theory of operation, we recommend that you read Chapter 9.  
For information on navigating the calibrator’s software menus, see the menu trees described in Appendix A.1.  
3.4.1. START-UP  
After all of the electrical and pneumatic connections are made, turn on the instrument. The exhaust fan and  
should start immediately. If the instrument is equipped with an internal photometer installed, the associated  
pump should also start up.  
The display should immediately display a single, horizontal dash in the upper left corner of the display. This will  
last approximately 30 seconds while the CPU loads the operating system.  
Once the CPU has completed this activity, it will begin loading the calibrator firmware and configuration data.  
During this process, string of messages will appear on the calibrator’s front panel display:  
System waits 3 seconds  
then automatically begins its  
SELECT START OR REMOTE  
START  
:
3
initialization routine.  
No action required.  
.
CHECKING FLASH STATUS  
:
1
System is checking the format of  
the instrument’s flash memory  
chip.  
If at this point,  
STARTING INSTRUMENT CODE  
STARTING INSTRUMENT W/FLASH  
:
1
**FLASH FORMAT INVALID**  
appears, contact T–API customer service  
The instrument is loading  
configuration and calibration  
data from the flash chip  
:
1
The instrument is loading  
the calibrator firmware.  
M703E CALIBRATOR  
BOOT PROGRESS [XXXXX 50%_ _ _ _ _]  
The revision level of the  
firmware installed in your  
analyzer is briefly displayed  
SOFTWARE REVISION B.0  
BOOT PROGRESS [XXXXXXXX 80% _ _]  
STANDBY  
TEST  
SYSTEM RESET  
Firmware fully  
booted  
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP  
Press CLR to clear initial  
warning messages.  
The calibrator should automatically switch to STANDBY mode after completing the boot-up sequence.  
05744 Rev B  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.4.2. WARM UP  
The M703E Photometric calibrator requires a minimum of 30 minutes for all of its internal components to reach a  
stable operating temperature. During that time, various portions of the instrument’s front panel will behave as  
follows. See Figure 3-1 for locations.  
Table 3-4: Front Panel Display during System Warm-Up  
Name  
Color  
Behavior  
Significance  
Displays Warning  
messages and Test  
Function values  
At initial start up the various warning messages will appear  
here (see Section 3.4.3 below).  
Main Message  
Field  
N/A  
Displays  
“STANDBY”  
Mode Field  
N/A  
Instrument is in STANDBY mode.  
STATUS LEDs  
Unit is operating in STANDBY mode.  
Active  
Green  
OFF  
This LED glows green when the instrument is actively  
producing calibration gas.  
This LED only glows when the calibrator is performing an automatic  
calibration sequence.  
Auto  
Fault  
Yellow  
Red  
OFF  
The calibrator is warming up and therefore many of its subsystems  
are not yet operating within their optimum ranges. Various warning  
messages will appear.  
BLINKING  
3.4.3. WARNING MESSAGES  
Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside be specified limits during the calibrator’s  
warm-up period, the software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up. If warning  
messages persist after the 30 minutes warm up period is over, investigate their cause using the troubleshooting  
guidelines in Chapter 11 of this manual.  
To view and clear warning messages, press:  
STANDBY  
TEST  
SYSTEM RESET  
Suppresses the  
warning messages  
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP  
STANDBY  
SYSTEM RESET  
MSG returns the active  
warnings to the message  
field.  
TEST  
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP  
STANDBY  
SYSTEM RESET  
Press CLR to clear the current  
TEST  
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP  
message.  
If more than one warning is  
active, the next message will take  
its place.  
SYSTEM  
TEST  
ANALOG CAL WARNING  
CLR SETUP  
Once the last warning has  
been cleared, the MESSAGE  
FIELD will return to displaying  
the currently selected TEST  
FUNCTION and value.  
NOTE:  
If a warning message persists after  
several attempts to clear it, the message  
may indicate a real problem and not an  
artifact of the warm-up period  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
Table 3-5 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start up.  
22  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Table 3-5: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
The calibrator’s A/D converter or at least one analog  
input channel has not been calibrated.  
ANALOG CAL WARNING  
Stored Configuration information has been reset to the  
factory settings or has been erased.  
CONFIG INITIALIZED  
DATA INITIALIZED  
The calibrator’s data storage was erased.  
The firmware is unable to communicate with the front  
panel.  
FRONT PANEL WARN  
The firmware is unable to communicate with either the  
O3 generator or photometer lamp I2C driver chips.  
LAMP DRIVER WARN  
O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING  
O3 GEN REFERENCE WARNING  
O3 PUMP WARNING  
The O3 generator lamp temperature is outside of  
allowable limits.  
The O3 generator’s reference detector has dropped  
below the minimum allowable limit.  
The pump associated with the O3 photometer has failed  
to turn on.  
The photometer lamp temperature is outside of  
allowable limits.  
PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING  
PHOTO REFERENCE WARNING  
REAR BOARD NOT DET  
RELAY BOARD WARN  
The photometer reference reading is outside of  
allowable limits.  
The calibrator’s motherboard was not detected during  
power up.  
The firmware is unable to communicate with the  
calibrator’s relay board.  
The calibrator has been turned off and on or the CPU  
was reset.  
SYSTEM RESET  
05744 Rev B  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.4.4. FUNCTIONAL CHECK  
7. After the calibrator’s components have warmed up for at least 30 minutes, verify that the software  
properly supports any hardware options that are installed.  
8. Check to make sure that the calibrator is functioning within allowable operating parameters. Appendix C  
includes a list of test functions viewable from the calibrator’s front panel as well as their expected values.  
These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing problems with your calibrator (see Section7.5.2).  
The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data sheet (part number 05760) lists these values before the  
instrument left the factory.  
To view the current values of these parameters press the following key sequence on the calibrator’s front  
panel. Remember until the unit has completed its warm up these parameters may not have stabilized.  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST  
TST> GEN STBY SEQ2 MSG CLR1 SETUP  
ACT=GENERATE [Value] PPB O3  
TARG=GENERATE [Value] PPB O3  
OUTPUT FLOW=[Value] LPM  
REG PRESSURE=[Value] PSIG  
BOX TEMP=[Value]ºC  
Toggle <TST TST> keys  
to scroll through list of  
functions  
O3 GEN REF=[Value] MV  
O3 GEN DRIVE=[Value] MV  
O3 LAMP TEMP=[Value]ºC  
PHOTO MEASURE[Value] MV  
PHOTO FLOW=[Value] LPM  
PHOTO LAMP TEMP=[Value]ºC  
PHOTO SPRESS=[Value] IN-HG-A  
PHOTO STEMP=[Value]ºC  
PHOTO SLOPE=[Value]  
1 Only appears when warning  
messages are active.  
2 Only appears when an one or  
more calibration sequences are  
programmed into the  
PHOTO OFFSET=[Value] PPB  
PHOTO STABIL=[Value] PPB  
TEST=[Value]MV  
calibrator’s memory.  
TIME=[HH:MM:SS]  
9. If your calibrator has an Ethernet card (Option 63) installed and your network is running a dynamic host  
configuration protocol (DHCP) software package, the Ethernet option will automatically configure its  
interface with your LAN. However, it is a good idea to check these settings to make sure that the DHCP  
has successfully downloaded the appropriate network settings from your network server (See Section  
7.5.2).  
If your network is not running DHCP, you will have to configure the calibrator’s interface manually (See  
Section 7.5.2.  
24  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.4.5. OPERATING MODES FOR THE O3 GENERATOR  
The O3 generator can be set to operate in three different modes:  
3.4.5.1. CNST (CONSTANT)  
In this mode, the O3 output of the generator is based on a single, constant, drive voltage. There is no Feedback  
loop control by the M703E’s CPU in this mode.  
3.4.5.2. REF (REFERENCE)  
The O3 control loop will use the reference detector’s measurement of the O3 generator’s UV lamp as input. This  
mode does not use the photometer to control the ozone generator.  
3.4.5.3. BNCH (BENCH)  
The O3 concentration control loop will use the photometer’s O3 measurement as input.  
THIS IS THE DEFAULT AND MOST COMMON MODE OF OPERATION.  
This setting will be the default mode of the M703E calibrator and will be mused whenever the calibrator is using  
the GENERATE AUTO command or the GENERATE sequence step to create a calibration mixture. When  
either the GENERATE MAN command or the MANUAL sequence step is active, the local O3 generator mode  
(chosen during when the command/step is programmed) will take precedence.  
3.4.6. SETTING THE O3 GENERATOR MODE  
To select a default O3 generator mode, press:  
05744 Rev B  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
TELEDYNE API  
Getting Started  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
3.4.7. SETTING THE M703E’S OUTPUT FLOW RATE  
The output flow rate of the M703E should be adjusted to match the gas flow requirements of the analyzers  
connected to the output manifold.  
NOTE  
The minimum total flow should equal the sum of the flow requirements of all of the instruments to  
which the M703E will be supplying calibration gas plus 1 LPM excess flow.  
Example: If the M703E is will be expected to supply calibration gas mixtures simultaneously to two  
analyzers each requiring 0.8 LPM , the proper Total Flow output should be set at a minimum of:  
(0.8 + 0.8) + 1.0= 2.6 LPM  
To set the output flow:  
1. Open the front panel of the calibrator down by releasing the two snap-in fasteners at the top of the front  
panel.  
2. Pull out the regulator knob and adjust the regulator until the desired flow is achieved.  
The front panel of the M703E displays the approximate output flow based on the measured regulator  
pressure, but this flow should be verified with an independent calibrated flow meter attached to the  
on of the CAL GAS outlets on the back of the instrument (see Figure 3-2).  
3. Push the regulator knob back in to lock.  
4. Close the front panel.  
Pressure  
Regulator  
Adjustment  
Knob  
Figure 3-10:  
Location of Pressure Regulator Adjustment Knob  
USER NOTES:  
26  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Frequently Asked Questions and Glossary  
4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS AND  
GLOSSARY  
4.1. FAQ’S  
The following list is a list from the T-API Customer Service Department of the 10 most commonly asked  
questions relating to the Model 703E Photometric Calibrator.  
Q: My ozone ACT =XXXX, why?  
A: Look at the Photo Ref/Meas readings from the photometer UV lamp detector are most likely too low and need  
to be adjusted. See Section 10.5  
Q: When I generate ozone, it takes a long time to settle out or it fluctuates around the target concentration until  
finally stabilizing.  
A: Perform an O3 Gen Calibration. See Section 8.2.  
Q: Why does the ENTR key sometimes disappear on the front panel display?  
A: Sometimes the ENTR key will disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for  
that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00.  
Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR key will re-appear.  
Q: How do I make the RS-232 Interface Work?  
A: See Chapter 7  
Q: When should I change the sintered filter(s) in the calibrators flow control(s) and how do I change them?  
A: The sintered filters do not require regular replacement. Should one require replacement as part of a  
troubleshooting or repair exercise, see Section 11.8.1.  
Q: How often should I rebuild the photometer pump on my calibrator?  
A: The photometer pump has been designed for longer service life than standard diaphragm pumps. When the  
pump wears out, the entire pump must be replaced.  
Q: How long do the UV lamps of the O3 generator and photometer last?  
A: The typical lifetime is about 2-3 years.  
4.2. GLOSSARY  
Acronym – A short form or abbreviation for a longer term. Often artificially made up of the first letters of the  
phrase’s words.  
APICOM – Name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers  
ASSY - Acronym for Assembly.  
cm3 – metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter. Same as the obsolete abbreviation “cc”.  
DIAG - Acronym for diagnostics, the diagnostic menu or settings of the system  
DHCP: acronym for dynamic host configuration protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers that  
automatically sets up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected  
to the network.  
05744 Rev B  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Frequently Asked Questions and Glossary  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
DOC – Acronym for Disk On Chip, the system’s central storage area for system operating system, firmware and  
data. This is a solid-state device without mechanical, moving parts that acts as a computer hard disk drive  
under DOS with disk drive label “C”. DOC chips come with 8 mb space in the E-series system standard  
configuration but are available in larger sizes  
DOS - Disk Operating System. The E-series systems use DR DOS  
EEPROM - also referred to as a FLASH chip.  
FEP - Acronym for Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that du Pont markets as  
Teflon® (along with PFA and PTFE).  
FLASH - flash memory is non-volatile, solid-state memory.  
I2C bus – read: I-square-C bus. A serial, clocked serial bus for communication between individual system  
components  
IC – Acronym for Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain many basic components  
such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies.  
iDAS - Acronym for Internal Data Acquisition System, previously referred to as DAS.  
LAN - Acronym for local area network.  
LED - Acronym for Light Emitting Diode.  
LPM – Acronym for liters per minute  
MFC – Acronym for “mass flow controller”.  
MOLAR MASS – The molar mass is the mass, expressed in grams, of one mole of a specific substance.  
Conversely, one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in  
grams as the atomic mass of that substance.  
EXAMPLE: The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12 grams,  
conversely, one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams.  
Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements  
PCA - Acronym for Printed Circuit Assembly, this is the PCB with electronic components installed and ready  
to use  
PCB - Acronym for printed circuit board, the bare circuit board without components  
PLC – Acronym for programmable logic controller, a device that is used to control instruments based on a logic  
level signal coming from the system  
PFA – Acronym for Per-Fluoro-Alkoxy, an inert polymer. One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon®  
(along with FEP and PTFE).  
PTFE – Acronym for Poly-Tetra-Fluoro-Ethylene, a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may  
react on other surfaces. One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon® (along with FEP and PFA).  
PVC – Acronym for Poly Vinyl Chloride.  
RS-232 - An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port  
RS-485 - An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port  
SLPM – Acronym for standard liters per minute; liters per minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure  
TCP/IP - Acronym for Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard communications protocol for  
Ethernet devices and the Internet  
VARS - Acronym for variables, the variables menu or settings of the system  
USER NOTES:  
28  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Optional Hardware and Software  
5. OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE  
This includes a brief description of the hardware and software options available for the M703E Photometric  
Calibrator. For assistance with ordering these options, please contact the Sales department of Teledyne –  
Advanced Pollution Instruments at:  
TOLL-FREE: 800-324-5190  
FAX: 858-657-9816  
TEL: 858-657-9800  
WEB SITE: www.teledyne-api.com  
5.1. CARRYING STRAP HANDLE (OPT 29)  
The chassis of the M703E calibrator allows to attach a strap handle for carrying the instrument (Figure 5-). The  
handle is located on the right side and pulls out to accommodate a hand for transport. When pushed in, the  
handle is nearly flush with the chassis, only protruding out about 9 mm (3/8”).  
Figure 5-1:  
M703E with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount Brackets  
Installing the strap handle prevents the use of the rack mount slides, although the rack mount brackets, Option  
21, can still be used.  
CAUTION  
A FULLY LOADED M703E WITH BOTH THE O3 GENERATOR AND PHOTOMETER  
OPTIONS INSTALLED WEIGHS ABOUT 16.3 KG (36 POUNDS).  
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY  
THE CALIBRATOR.  
MAKE SURE TO DISCONNECT ALL CABLES AND TUBING FROM THE CALIBRATOR  
BEFORE CARRYING IT.  
05744 Rev B  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Optional Hardware and Software  
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
5.2. COMMUNICATION OPTIONS  
5.2.1. RS232 MODEM CABLES (OPTS 60 AND 60A)  
The analyzer can have come standard with a shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about 1.8 m  
length, which should fit most computers of recent build. This cable can be ordered as Option 60.  
Option 60A consists of a shielded, straight-through serial cable of about 1.8 m length to connect the calibrator’s  
COM1 port to a computer, a code activated switch or any other communications device that is equipped with a  
DB-25 female connector. The cable is terminated with one DB-9 female connector and one DB-25 male  
connector. The DB-9 connector fits the calibrator’s RS-232 port.  
5.2.2. ETHERNET CABLE (OPT 60B)  
Option 60B consists of a 7-foot long, CAT-5 network cable, terminated at both ends with standard RJ-45  
connectors. This cable is used to connect the M703E to any standard ETHERNET socket.  
5.2.3. RS-232 MULTIDROP (OPT 62)  
The multidrop option is used with any of the RS-232 serial ports to enable communications of up to eight  
calibrators with the host computer over a chain of RS-232 cables via the instruments COM1 Port. It is subject to  
the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard.  
CPU Card  
Rear Panel  
(as seen from inside)  
Multidrop  
Card  
Figure 5-1:  
M703E Multidrop Card  
The option consists of a small printed circuit assembly, which plugs into to the calibrator’s CPU card (see Figure  
5-6). It is connected to the RS-232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the instrument’s back panel via a cable to the  
motherboard. One option 62 is required for each calibrator along with one 6’ straight-through, DB9 male DB9  
Female cable (P/N WR0000101).  
30  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Optional Hardware and Software  
5.2.4. ETHERNET (OPT 63)  
The ETHERNET option allows the calibrator to be connected to any Ethernet local area network (LAN) running  
TCP/IP. The local area network must have routers capable of operating at 10BaseT. If Internet access is  
available through the LAN, this option also allows communication with the instrument over the public Internet.  
Maximum communication speed is limited by the RS-232 port to 115.2 kBaud.  
When installed, this option is electronically connected to the instrument’s COM2 serial port making that port no  
longer available for RS-232/RS-485 communications.  
The option consists of a Teledyne Instruments designed Ethernet card (see Figures 5-7 and 5-8), and a 7-foot  
long CAT-5 network cable, terminated at both ends with standard RJ-45 connectors.  
Figure 5-2:  
M703E Ethernet Card  
CPU  
Card  
Rear Panel  
(as seen from inside)  
Ethernet  
Card  
Female RJ-45  
Connector  
LNK LED  
ACT LED  
TxD LED  
RxD LED  
RS-232  
Connector To  
Motherboard  
Interior View  
Exterior View  
Figure 5-3:  
M703E Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed  
For more information on setting up and using this option, see Section7.5  
05744 Rev B  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Optional Hardware and Software  
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
5.2.5. ETHERNET + MULTIDROP (OPT 64)  
This option allows the instrument to communicate on both RS-232 and ETHERNET networks simultaneously. It  
includes the following:  
RS232 MODEM CABLES (OPT 60A)  
ETHERNET CABLE (OPT 60B)  
RS-232 MULTIDROP (OPT 62)  
ETHERNET (OPT 63  
5.3. ADDITIONAL MANUAL (OPT 70)  
Additional copies of the printed user’s manual can be purchased from the factory. Please specify the serial  
number of your calibrator so that we can match the manual version.  
This operator’s manual is also available on CD. The electronic document is stored in Adobe Systems Inc.  
Portable Document Format (PDF) and is viewable with Adobe Acrobat Reader® software, which can be  
downloaded for free at http://www.adobe.com/  
The electronic version of this manual can also be downloaded free at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/.  
Note that the online version is optimized for fast download and may not print with the same quality as the manual  
on CD.  
5.4. EXTENDED WARRANTY (OPT 92)  
An extended, two-year warranty is available for the M703E calibrator. This option must be specified upon  
ordering the calibrator.  
5.5. NIST TRACEABLE, PRIMARY STANDARD CERTIFICATION  
The Model 703E can be used as a Primary Ozone Standard. For this application the performance of the M703E  
Photometric Calibrator calibrated to Standard Reference Photometer (SRP)  
Calibrators ordered with this option are verified and validated in accordance with the procedures prescribed by  
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) under Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50,  
Appendix D (40 CFR Part 50).  
An NIST traceable Certificate of Calibration and accompanies the instrument.  
USER NOTES:  
32  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
SECTION II  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
05744 Rev B  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES:  
34  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6. OPERATING THE M703E CALIBRATOR  
The M703E calibrator is a computer-controlled calibrator with a dynamic menu interface for easy and yet  
powerful and flexible operation. All major operations are controlled from the front panel display and keyboard  
through these user-friendly menus.  
To assist in navigating the system’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in Appendix A of this manual.  
NOTE  
The flowcharts in this chapter depict the manner in which the front panel display/keyboard interface is  
used to operate the M703E Photometric Calibrator.  
They depict typical representations of the display during the various operations being described.  
They are not intended to be exact and may differ slightly from the actual display of your system.  
NOTE  
When editing values in the software, the ENTR key may disappear if you select a value that is invalid or  
out of the allowable range for that parameter (e.g. such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00).  
Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR key will re-appear.  
05744 Rev B  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.1. TEST FUNCTIONS  
A variety of TEST FUNCTIONS are available for viewing at the front panel whenever the calibrator is at the  
MAIN MENU. These measurements provide information about the present operating status of the calibrator and  
are useful during troubleshooting (see Chapter 11). Table 6-1 lists the available TEST functions.  
To view these TEST functions, press <TST or TST> from the main menu and the Test Functions will scroll at  
the top center of the display.  
Table 6-1: Test Functions Defined  
TEST MEASUREMENT  
DESCRIPTION  
ACT=GENERATE XX PPB O3  
Actual concentration being generated, computed from  
real-time inputs.  
TARG=GENERATE XX PPB O3  
OUTPUT FLOW=X.XXX LPM  
REG PRESSURE=XX.X PSIG  
BOX TEMP=XX.X ºC  
Target concentration to generate.  
Output flow rate (computed from regulator pressure).  
Regulator pressure.  
Internal chassis temperature.  
O3 GEN REF=XXXX.X MV  
O3 GEN DRIVE=XXXX.X MV  
O3 LAMP TEMP=XX.X ºC  
O3 generator reference detector reading.  
O3 generator lamp drive output.  
O3 generator lamp temperature.  
Photometer detector measure reading.  
Photometer detector reference reading.  
Photometer sample flow rate.  
PHOTO MEASURE=XXXX.X MV  
PHOTO REFERENCE=XXXX.X MV  
PHOTO FLOW=X.XXX LPM  
PHOTO LAMP TEMP=XX.X ºC  
PHOTO SPRESS=XX.X IN-HG-A  
PHOTO STEMP=XX.X ºC  
Photometer lamp temperature.  
Photometer sample pressure.  
Photometer sample temperature.  
PHOTO SLOPE=X.XXX  
Photometer slope computed during zero/span bench  
calibration.  
PHOTO OFFSET=X.X PPB  
PHOTO STABIL=X.X PPB  
TEST=XXXX.X MV  
Photometer offset computed during zero/span bench  
calibration.  
Photometer concentration stability (standard deviation of  
25 bench concentration samples taken 10 seconds apart).  
Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output, selected  
with TEST_CHAN_ID variable.  
TIME=HH:MM:SS  
Current instrument time of day clock. (24 hour format)  
36  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.2. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES  
The M703E calibrator software has a variety of operating modes. Most commonly, the calibrator will be  
operating in STANDBY mode. In this mode, the calibrator and all of its subsystems are inactive although TEST  
functions and WARNING messages are still updated can be examined via the front panel.  
The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode. This mode is used for performing certain  
configuration operations, such as programming the concentration of source gases, setting up automatic  
calibration sequences and configuring the analog / digital inputs and outputs. The SET UP mode is also used  
for accessing various diagnostic tests and functions during troubleshooting.  
Mode Field  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
GENERATE Key  
STANDBY Key  
Figure 6-1:  
Front Panel Display  
The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running.  
Besides STANDBY and SETUP, other modes the calibrator can be operated in are:  
Table 6-2: Calibrator Operating Modes  
MODE  
MEANING  
DIAG  
One of the calibrator’s diagnostic modes is being utilized. When  
those diagnostic functions that have the greatest potential to  
conflict with generating concentrations are active, the instrument  
is automatically placed into standby mode.  
GENERATE  
In this mode, the instrument is engaged in producing calibration  
gas.  
SETUP3  
SETUP mode is being used to configure the calibrator.  
STANDBY  
The calibrator is not actively generating gas.  
3 The revision of the Teledyne Instruments software installed in this calibrator will be  
displayed following the word SETUP. E.g. “SETUP B.4”  
05744 Rev B  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.3. STANDBY MODE  
When the M703E Photometric Calibrator is in standby mode, it is at rest.  
Some functions under the SETUP MORE DIAG submenu, those which conflict with accurate  
creation of calibration gas mixtures (e.g. ANALOG OUTPUT STEP TEST) automatically place the  
calibrator into STANDBY mode when activated  
NOTE  
The M703E calibrator should always be placed in STANDBY mode when not needed to produce  
calibration gas.  
This can be done manually by pressing the STBY button that appears when the calibrator’s display is  
showing the top-level menu (see Figure 6-1).  
When programming a calibration sequences the STANDBY step should always be inserted at the end of  
the sequence.  
38  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.4. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE GENERATE MODE  
The GENERATE mode is the mode of operation where the M703E is actively producing calibration gas, either  
zero or some specified concentration of ozone. In the GENERATE mode the Zero Air Pump (if enabled) and  
Photometer Pump are turned on.  
6.4.1. GENERATE AUTO: Basic Generation of Calibration Gas  
This is the simplest procedure for generating calibration gas mixtures. To generate calibration gas, press  
The M703E will now enter GENERATE mode.  
05744 Rev B  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.5. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SEQUENCES  
The M703E calibrator can be set up to perform automatic calibration sequences of multiple steps. These  
sequences can perform all of the calibration operations available for manual operation and can be set up to be  
triggered by using the front panel buttons, the M703E’s internal timer, the external digital control inputs, the RS-  
232 interface, via the optional Ethernet interface or even as sub-processes in another sequence.  
6.5.1. SETUP SEQ: PROGRAMMING CALIBRATION  
SEQUENCES  
A sequence is a database of single or multiple steps where each single step is an instruction that causes the  
instrument to perform an operation. These steps are grouped under a user defined SEQUENCE NAME.  
For each sequence, seven attributes must be programmed. They are:  
Table 6-3: Automatic Calibration SEQUENCE Set Up Attributes  
ATTRIBUTE NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
Allows the user to create a text string of up to 10 characters identifying the sequence.  
Number of times, between 0 and 100, to execute the same sequence. A value of 0  
(zero) causes the sequence to execute indefinitely.  
REPEAT COUNT  
CC INPUT  
Specifies which of the M703E’s Digital Control Inputs will initiate the sequence.  
Specifies which of the M703E’s Digital Control Outputs will be set when the sequence  
is active.  
CC OUTPUT  
Enables or disables an internal automatic timer that can initiate sequences using the  
M703E’s built in clock.  
TIMER ENABLE  
STEPS  
A series of submenus for programming the activities and instructions that make up  
the calibration sequence.  
Allows the user to select the reporting style the calibrator uses to report the progress  
of the sequences , on the front panels display, as it runs  
PROGRESS MODE  
The types of instruction steps available for creating calibration sequences are:  
Table 6-4: Calibration SEQUENCE Step Instruction  
INSTRUCTION NAME  
GENERATE  
DESCRIPTION  
Puts the instrument into GENERATE mode. Similar in operation and effect to the  
GENERATE AUTO function used at the front panel.  
DURATION  
Adds a period of time between the previous instruction and the next  
Calls another sequence to be executed at this time. The calling sequence will  
resume running when the called sequence is completed. Up to 5 levels of nested  
sequences can be programmed.  
EXECSEQ  
Allows the sequence to activate the M703E’s digital control outputs. Similar to the  
CC OUPUT attribute, but can be set and reset by individual steps.  
SETCCOUTPUT  
NOTE  
It is generally a good idea to end each calibration sequence with an instruction to return the instrument  
to STANDBY mode.  
40  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
To create a sequence, use the instructions in the following sections to name the sequence, set it associated  
parameters and define the steps to be included.  
6.5.1.1. Activating a Sequence from the M703E Front Panel  
To activate an already programmed sequence from the front panel, press:  
05744 Rev B  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.5.1.2. Naming a Sequence  
The first step of creating a calibration sequence is to assign it a name. The name can be up to 10 characters  
and can be comprised of any alpha character (A to Z), and numeral (0 to 9) or the underscore character (“_“).  
To assign a name to a sequence, press,  
STANDBY  
ACT CAL=0.000 LPM  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
GAS SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION  
EDIT PRINT  
EXIT  
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently  
programmed into the M703E.  
OTHERWISE ...  
SETUP X.X  
END OF SEQUENCES  
INS  
PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X NAME:0  
SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
Deletes the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Edits the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Scrolls back and forth between  
existing sequences  
SETUP X.X NAME:[0]  
EXIT discards the  
new NAME  
<CH CH>  
INS DEL  
[0]  
ENTER EXIT  
Moves the  
cursor one  
character left or  
right.  
ENTR accepts the  
new NAME  
Inserts a new a  
character at the  
cursor location.  
Toggle this key to cycle  
Deletes a  
character at the  
cursor location.  
through the range of  
numerals and available  
characters:  
(“A – Z”; “0 – 9” & “ _ ”)  
42  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.5.1.3. Setting the Repeat Count for a Sequence  
The sequence can be set to repeat a certain number of times, from 1 to 100. It can also be set to repeat  
indefinitely by inputting a zero (0) into the REPEAT COUNTER.  
To set the REPEAT COUNTER, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION  
END OF SEQUENCES  
EDIT PRINT  
EXIT  
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently  
programmed into the M703E.  
OTHERWISE ...  
SETUP X.X  
INS  
PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X NAME:0  
SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
Deletes the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Edits the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Continue pressing SET> until ...  
Scrolls back and forth between  
existing sequences  
SETUP X.X REPEAT COUNT:1  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X NAME:[0]  
0
0
1
ENTER EXIT  
EXIT discards the  
new NAME  
ENTR accepts the  
new NAME  
Toggle these keys to set the repeat count from 1 to 100.  
Enter “0” to cause the sequence to loop indefinitely  
05744 Rev B  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.5.1.4. Using the M703E’s Internal Clock to Trigger Sequences  
Sequences can be set to trigger based on the M703E’s internal clock. The sequence can be set up to start at a  
predetermined date and time. It can also be set to repeat after a predetermined delay time.  
So activate and sequence timer, press:  
44  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
To specify a starting time for the sequence, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
O3  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION  
EDIT PRINT  
EXIT  
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently  
programmed into the M703E.  
OTHERWISE ...  
SETUP X.X  
END OF SEQUENCES  
INS  
PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X NAME:0  
SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
Deletes the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Edits the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Scrolls back and forth between  
existing sequences  
Continue pressing SET> until ...  
SETUP X.X TIMER ENABLE:ENABLED  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
TIMER START: 01-JAN-06 00:00  
<SET SET> EDIT  
SETUP X.X  
TIMER START: 01-JAN-06 00:00  
EXIT discards the  
new setting  
0
1
JAN  
0
6
ENTR EXIT  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
Toggle these keys  
to enter starting  
day, month and  
year.  
DAY  
MONTH YEAR  
SYSTEM  
1
TIME: 12:00  
EXIT discards the  
new setting  
2
:0  
0
ENTR EXIT  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
Toggle these keys  
to enter the starting  
time  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
05744 Rev B  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
To set the delta timer, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
is in standby mode.  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION  
END OF SEQUENCES  
EDIT PRINT  
EXIT  
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently  
programmed into the M703E.  
OTHERWISE ...  
SETUP X.X  
INS  
PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X NAME:0  
SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
Deletes the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Edits the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Scrolls back and forth between  
existing sequences  
Continue pressing SET> until ...  
SETUP X.X  
TIMER DELTA: 001:00:00  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
TIMER DELTA: 0 Days  
EXIT discards the  
new setting  
0
0
0
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these keys to enter  
number of days to wait  
between before running  
sequence again.  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
SYSTEM  
1
TIMER DELTA 00:00  
:0  
EXIT discards the  
new setting  
2
0
ENTR EXIT  
ENTR accepts the  
Toggle these keys  
to enter the starting  
time  
new setting  
HOUR  
MINUTE  
46  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.5.1.5. Setting Up Control Inputs for a Sequence  
The M703E calibrator’ control inputs allow the entire sequence to be triggered from an external source. This  
feature allows the calibrator to operate in a slave mode so that external control sources, such as a data logger  
can initiate the calibration sequences.  
Each of the M703E calibrator’s control outputs, located on the back of the instrument (see Figure 3-2)  
12 separate ON/OFF switches assigned to separate calibration sequences or;  
A 12-bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to 4095 separate calibration  
sequences.  
To assign a CC INPUT pattern / code to a particular sequence, press.  
05744 Rev B  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.5.1.6. Setting Up Control Outputs for a Sequence  
The M703E calibrator’s control outputs allow the entire sequence to be triggered from an external source. This  
feature allows the calibrator to control devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable logic  
controllers (PLC’s), dataloggers, or digital relays/valve drivers.  
They can be used as:  
12 separate ON/OFF switches assigned to separate calibration sequences, or;  
A 12-bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to 4095 separate calibration  
sequences.  
They can be set to:  
Be active whenever a particular calibration sequence is operating, or;  
Activate/deactivate as individual steps within a calibration sequence are run See Section 6.5.2.5).  
To assign a CC OUTPUT pattern / code to a particular sequence, press.  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION  
END OF SEQUENCES  
EDIT PRINT  
EXIT  
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently  
programmed into the M703E.  
OTHERWISE ...  
SETUP X.X  
INS  
PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X NAME:0  
SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
Deletes the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Edits the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Scrolls back and forth between  
existing sequences  
Continue pressing SET> until ...  
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT:DISABLED  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT ENABLE:OFF  
EXIT discards the  
OFF  
ENTER EXIT  
new setting  
Toggle this key  
turn the CC input  
ON/OFF  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT:[0]00000000000  
<CH CH> [0] ENTER EXIT  
EXIT discards the  
new setting  
Moves the  
cursor one  
character left or  
right.  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON/OFF (0 or 1).  
Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control  
output pins located on the back of the M703E (see Figure 3-2),  
The left most bit is Bit 1, the next bit to the right, bit 2,  
progressing rightward to bit 12 (see Figure 3-10 for connector  
pin assignments)  
48  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.5.1.7. Setting the PROGRESS Reporting Mode for the Sequences  
As sequences run, the M703E calibrator reports progress by displaying a message in the MODE field of the front  
panel display (See Figure 3-1). There are several types of report modes available  
Table 6-5: Sequence Progress Reporting Mode  
MODE  
DESCRIPTION  
Shows the progress as the sequence name and step number. This is the traditional display.  
Example: “SO2_Test-2”.  
STEP  
Shows the progress as a percent (0–100%) of the total sequence duration.  
Example: “SEQ 48%”  
PCT  
Shows the progress as days, hours, minutes and seconds elapsed, counting up from 0.  
Example (<1 day): “T+01:30:25” (i.e. 1 hour, 30 minutes, 25 seconds elapsed)  
Example (>=1 day): “T+1d30:25” (i.e. 1 day, 30 hours, 25 minutes elapsed)  
Shows the progress as days, hours, minutes, and seconds remaining, counting down to 0.  
Example (<1 day): “T–01:30:25” (i.e. 1 hour, 30 minutes, 25 seconds remaining)  
Example (>=1 day): “T–1d30:25” (i.e. 1 day, 30 hours, 25 minutes remaining)  
ELAP  
REM  
To select a PROGRESS report mode, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION  
END OF SEQUENCES  
EDIT PRINT  
EXIT  
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently  
programmed into the M703E.  
OTHERWISE ...  
SETUP X.X  
INS  
PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X NAME:0  
SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
Deletes the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Edits the sequence shown  
in the message field  
Scrolls back and forth between  
existing sequences  
Continue pressing SET> until ...  
STEPS Submenu  
SETUP X.X  
PROGRESS MODE:REM  
EDIT  
<SET  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
PROGRESS MODE:REM  
STEP PCT ELAP REM  
ENTR EXIT  
Use these keys to choose  
a PROGRESS MODE  
SETUP X.X  
PROGRESS MODE:ELAP  
EDIT  
<SET  
EXIT  
8
05744 Rev B  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.5.2. ADDING SEQUENCE STEPS  
To insert an instruction step into a sequence, navigate to the INSERT STEP submenu by pressing:  
50  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.5.2.1. The Generate Step  
This step operates and is programmed similarly to the GENERATE AUTO.  
At the end of the programming sequence, the M703E firmware will automatically insert a DURATION step that  
needs to be defined.  
To insert a GENERATE step into a sequence, press:  
Starting at the INSERT STEPS  
Submenu  
INSERT STEP Submenu  
SETUP X.X  
INSERT STEP: GENERATE  
ENTR EXIT  
PREV NEXT  
SETUP X.X  
GENERATE:ZERO  
ZERO ENTR EXIT  
Toggle this key to  
switch between  
ZERO AIR and O3  
modes.  
SETUP X.X  
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3  
.0 PPB O3  
0
0
0
ENTR EXIT  
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle this key to  
to scroll through the  
available units of  
measure  
SETUP X.X  
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3  
0
.0  
0
1
0
PCT O3  
EXIT discards the new  
target concentration  
ENTR accepts the new  
target concentration  
Toggle these keys  
to set the target  
concentration.  
SETUP X.X  
DURATION: 1.0 MIN  
.0  
0
0
ENTR  
EXIT  
EXIT  
Toggle these keys  
to set DURATION  
of this step  
SETUP X.X  
3) DURATION : 10.0 MIN  
INS DEL EDIT  
PREV NEXT  
05744 Rev B  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.5.2.2. The STANDBY Step  
The STANDBY step places the calibrator into STANDBY mode  
To insert a STANDBY step into a sequence, press:  
6.5.2.3. The DURATION Step  
The duration step causes the M703E to continue performing whatever action was called for by the preceding  
step of the sequence.  
If that step put the instrument into STANDBY mode, the calibrator stays in STANDBY mode for the  
period specified by the DURATION step,  
If that step put the instrument into GENERATE mode, the will continue to GENERATE whatever  
calibration mixture was programmed into that step for the period specified by the DURATION step,  
To insert a DURATION step into a sequence, press:  
52  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.5.2.4. The EXECSEQ Step  
The EXECSEQ step allows the sequence to call another, already programmed sequence. This is a very  
powerful tool in that it allows the user to create a “toolbox” of often-used operations that can then be mixed and  
matched by an overhead sequence:  
To insert an EXECSEQ step into a sequence, press:  
05744 Rev B  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.5.2.5. The CC OUTPUT Step  
This instruction causes the sequence to set or reset the M703E’s digital control outputs. It is very useful in  
situations where the control outputs are being used to trigger other devices that need to be turned off and on in  
synch with the operation of the calibrator as it progress through the sequence.  
To insert a CC OUTPUT step into a sequence, press:  
Starting at the STEPS Submenu  
INSERT STEP Submenu  
SETUP X.X  
INSERT STEP: GENERATE  
ENTR EXIT  
PREV NEXT  
Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the  
list of available instructions  
SETUP X.X  
INSERT STEP: PURGE  
ENTR  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT:DISABLED  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT ENABLE:OFF  
EXIT discards the  
OFF  
ENTER EXIT  
new setting  
Toggle this key  
turn the CC input  
ON/OFF  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT:[0]00000000000  
<CH CH> [0] ENTER EXIT  
Moves the  
cursor one  
character left or  
right.  
Toggle this key to turn the  
selected bit ON/OFF  
(0 or 1)  
SETUP X.X  
2) SET CC OUTPUT 000100010110  
INS DEL EDIT EXIT  
PREV NEXT  
54  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.5.2.6. Deleting or Editing an Individual Step in a Sequence  
To delete or edit an individual step in an existing Sequence, press:  
05744 Rev B  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.5.3. DELETING A SEQUENCE  
To delete a sequence from the M703E calibrator’s memory, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
O3  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION  
EDIT PRINT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
3) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
Scrolls back and forth between  
existing sequences  
SETUP X.X  
DELETE SEQUENCES  
YES NO  
SEQUENCE DELETED  
END OF SEQUENCES  
SETUP X.X  
PREV NEXT  
INS  
PRNT EXIT  
56  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.6. SETUP CFG  
Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument’s configuration information. This display lists the calibrator model,  
serial number, firmware revision, software library revision, CPU type and other information.  
Use this information to identify the software and hardware when contacting customer service.  
Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here.  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
SETUP MENU  
O3 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
Press NEXT of PREV to move back and  
forth through the following list of  
Configuration information:  
SETUP X.X  
PREV NEXT  
M703E Cailbrator  
Press exit at  
any time to  
return to the  
SETUP menu  
MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER  
PART NUMBER  
SERIAL NUMBER  
SOFTWARE REVISION  
LIBRARY REVISION  
EXIT  
iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION (Only  
appears if INET option is installed)  
CPU TYPE & OS REVISION  
DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION  
SAVED  
05744 Rev B  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.7. SETUP CLK  
6.7.1. SETTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S TIME AND DAY  
The M703E has a time of day clock that supports the DURATION step of the calibration sequence feature, time  
of day TEST function, and time stamps on most COM port messages. To set the clock’s time and day, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
SETUP X.X  
TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK  
TIME DATE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
TIME: 12:00  
0
SETUP X.X  
DATE: 01-JAN-05  
1
2
:0  
ENTR EXIT  
0
1
JAN  
0
5
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these  
keys to enter  
current hour  
Toggle these keys  
to enter current day,  
month and year.  
HOUR  
SETUP X.X  
MINUTE  
DAY MONTH YEAR  
TIME: 22:30  
SETUP X.X  
DATE: 18-JUN-05  
2
2
:3  
0
ENTR EXIT  
1
8
JUN  
0
5
ENTR EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK  
EXIT returns to  
SETUP X.X  
display  
TIME DATE  
EXIT  
58  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.7.2. ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S SPEED  
In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run faster or slower, you can adjust a variable called CLOCK_ADJ  
to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day. To change this variable, press:  
05744 Rev B  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.8. SETUP PASS  
The M703E provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized  
adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu item, the system will prompt the user  
for a password anytime a password-protected function is requested.  
There are three levels of password protection, which correspond to operator, maintenance and configuration  
functions. Each level allows access to all of the functions in the previous level.  
Table 6-6: Password Levels  
PASSWORD  
No password  
101  
LEVEL  
MENU ACCESS ALLOWED  
Operator  
All functions of the MAIN menu: TEST, GEN, initiate SEQ , MSG, CLR  
Access to Primary and Secondary Setup Menus except for VARS & DIAG  
Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG  
Maintenance  
Configuration  
818  
To enable or disable passwords, press:  
60  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following keypad sequence would be required to enter the VARS or  
DIAG submenus:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
EXIT  
COMM VARS DIAG  
SYSTEM  
0
ENTER SETUP PASS:0  
Press individual  
keys to set  
number  
0
1
0
ENTR EXIT  
SYSTEM  
8
ENTER SETUP PASS:0  
8
EXAMPLE: This  
password enables the  
SETUP mode  
ENTR EXIT  
M703E enters selected menu  
NOTE  
The instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus, even if  
passwords are disabled, but it displays the default password (818) upon entering these menus. The  
user only has to press ENTR to access the password-protected menus but does not have to enter the  
required number code.  
05744 Rev B  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.9. SETUP DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT: USING THE TEST  
CHANNEL ANALOG OUTPUT  
The M703E calibrator comes equipped with one analog output. It can be set by the user to carry the current  
signal level of any one of the parameters listed in Table 6-8 and will output an analog VDC signal that rises and  
falls in relationship with the value of the parameter.  
Pin-outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are:  
ANALOG OUT  
+
Figure 6-2:  
M703E the TEST CHANNEL Connector  
6.9.1. CONFIGURING THE TEST CHANNEL ANALOG OUTPUT  
6.9.1.1. The Analog I/O Configuration Submenu.  
Table 6-7 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the M703E calibrator.  
Table 6-7: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions  
SUB MENU  
FUNCTION  
AOUTS  
CALIBRATED:  
Shows the status of the analog output calibration (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration  
of all analog output channels.  
CAL_OUT_1:  
CAL_OUT_2  
NOT USED ON THE M703E  
TEST OUTPUT  
Configures the 11 analog output:  
RANGE1: Selects the DCV full-scale value of the output.  
OVERRANGE: Turns the ± 5% over-range feature ON/OFF for this output channel.  
REC_OFS1: Sets a voltage offset (not available when RANGE is set to CURRent loop.  
AUTO_CAL1: Sets the channel for automatic or manual calibration  
CALIBRATED1: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but on this  
one channel only.  
AIN CALIBRATED  
Shows the calibration status (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital  
converter circuit on the motherboard.  
1Changes to RANGE or REC_OFS require recalibration of this output.  
To configure the analyzer’s TEST CHANNEL, set the electronic signal type of each channel and calibrate the  
outputs. This consists of:  
10. Choosing a TEST CHANNEL function to be output on the channel.  
11. Selecting a signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device attached to the  
channel.  
12. Determining if the over-range feature is needed and turn it on or off accordingly.  
13. Adding a bipolar recorder offset to the signal if required (Section6.9.1.5).  
14. Calibrating the output channel. This can be done automatically or manually for each channel (see  
Sections 6.9.2).  
62  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
To access the analog I/O configuration sub menu, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
EXIT  
Make sure that  
the M703E is in  
standby mode.  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
COMM VARS DIAG  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
ENTER PASSWORD:818  
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these  
keys to enter the  
correct  
DIAG  
SIGNAL I/O  
PASSWORD  
NEXT  
ENTR  
EXIT  
Continue pressing NEXT until ...  
AIO Configuration Submenu  
DIAG  
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION  
ENTR  
PREV NEXT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
DIAG AIO  
A OUTS CALIBRATED: NO  
<SET SET> CAL  
DIAG AIO  
CONC_OUT_1: 5V, OVR, NOCAL  
<SET SET> EDIT  
Not used in the  
M703E  
DIAG AIO  
CONC_OUT_2: 5V, OVR, NOCAL  
<SET SET> EDIT  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: 5V,OVR, NOCAL  
<SET SET> EDIT  
DIAG AIO  
AIN CALIBRATED: NO  
<SET SET> CAL  
05744 Rev B  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.9.1.2. Selecting a Test Channel Function to Output  
The Test Functions available to be reported are:  
Table 6-8: Test Channels Functions Available on the M703E’s Analog Output  
TEST CHANNEL  
DESCRIPTION  
ZERO  
FULL SCALE  
NONE  
TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF  
O3 PHOTO MEAS  
The raw output of the photometer during its  
0 mV  
0 mV  
5000 mV*  
5000 mV*  
measure cycle  
O3 PHOTO REF  
O3 GEN REF  
The raw output of the photometer during its  
reference cycle  
The raw output of the O3 generator’s  
reference detector  
0 mV  
5000 mV*  
OUTPUT FLOW  
The gas flow being output through the CAL  
GAS outlets on the back of the instrument  
0 cm3/min  
0 PSIG  
0 "Hg  
5,000 cm3/min  
105 PSIG  
REGULATOR PRESSURE  
SAMPLE PRESSURE  
The gas pressure measured by the O3  
generator pressure sensor  
The pressure of gas in the photometer  
absorption tube  
40 "Hg-In-A  
SAMPLE FLOW  
SAMPLE TEMP  
The gas flow rate through the photometer  
0 cm3/min  
1000 cc3/min  
The temperature of gas in the photometer  
absorption tube  
0 C  
70 C  
PHOTO LAMP TEMP  
O3 LAMP TEMP  
The temperature of the photometer UV lamp  
0 C  
70 C  
The temperature of the O3 generator’s UV  
lamp  
0 mV  
5000 mV  
CHASSIS TEMP  
The temperature inside the M703E’s chassis  
0 C  
70 C  
(same as BOX TEMP)  
O3 PHOTO CONC  
The current concentration of O3 being  
measured by the photometer.  
1 ppm  
0 C  
Once a function is selected, the instrument not only begins to output a signal on the analog output, but also adds  
TEST to the list of Test Functions viewable via the Front Panel Display.  
64  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
To activate the TEST Channel and select a function press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
Make sure that  
the M703E is in  
standby mode.  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
EXIT  
COMM VAR DIAG  
SETUP X.X  
ENTER PASSWORD  
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these  
keys to enter the  
correct  
PASSWORD  
DIAG  
SIGNAL I/O  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR EXIT  
Continue pressing NEXT until ...  
DIAG  
TEST CHANNEL OUTPUT  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR  
EXIT  
DIAG  
TEST CHANNEL:NONE  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these keys to  
choose a TEST  
channel parameter  
DIAG  
TEST CHANNEL:CHASSIS TEMP  
ENTR EXIT  
EXIT discards the new  
PREV NEXT  
setting  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
05744 Rev B  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.9.1.3. TEST CHANNEL VOLTAGE RANGE Configuration  
In its standard configuration the analog outputs is set to output a 0 – 5 VDC signals. Several other output  
ranges are available (see Table 7-5). Each range has is usable from -5% to + 5% of the rated span.  
Table 6-9: Analog Output Voltage Range Min/Max  
RANGE SPAN  
0-100 mVDC  
0-1 VDC  
MINIMUM OUTPUT  
-5 mVDC  
MAXIMUM OUTPUT  
105 mVDC  
-0.05 VDC  
1.05 VDC  
0-5 VDC  
-0.25 VDC  
5.25 VDC  
0-10 VDC  
-0.5 VDC  
10.5 VDC  
The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC.  
To change the output range, press,  
From the  
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU  
(See Section 6.9.1.1)  
DIAG  
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR  
EXIT  
EXIT  
DIAG AIO  
SET>  
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO  
CAL  
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the  
output to be configured  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: 5V, OVR, NOCAL  
Pressing ENTR records  
the new setting and  
returns to the previous  
menu.  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
These keys set  
the signal level  
and type of the  
selected  
Pressing EXIT ignores the  
new setting and returns to  
the previous menu.  
DIAG AIO  
0.1V  
TEST_OUTPUT: RANGE: 5V  
5V 10V ENTR EXIT  
1V  
channel  
66  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.9.1.4. Turning the TEST CHANNEL Over-Range Feature ON/OFF  
In its default configuration a ± 5% over-range is available on each of the M703E’s TEST CHANNEL output. This  
over-range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current.  
To turn the over-range feature on or off, press:  
05744 Rev B  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.9.1.5. Adding a Recorder Offset to the TEST CHANNEL  
Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal be significantly different from the baseline of the  
recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point. This can be achieved in  
the M703E by defining a zero offset, a small voltage (e.g., 10% of span).  
To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel, press:  
68  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.9.2. TEST CHANNEL CALIBRATION  
TEST CHANNEL calibration needs to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer (performed in the factory as  
part of the configuration process) or whenever re-calibration is required. The analog outputs can be calibrated  
automatically or adjusted manually.  
During automatic calibration, the analyzer tells the output circuitry to generate a zero mV signal and high-scale  
point signal (usually about 90% of chosen analog signal scale) then measures actual signal of the output. Any  
error at zero or high-scale is corrected with a slope and offset.  
Automatic calibration can be performed via the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, or by using the CAL button  
located inside TEST_CHANNEL submenu. By default, the analyzer is configured so that calibration of TEST  
CHANNEL can be initiated with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command.  
6.9.2.1. Enabling or disabling the TEST CHANNEL Auto-Cal Feature  
To enable or disable the Auto-Cal feature for the TEST CHANNEL, press.  
From the  
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU  
(See Section 6.9.1.1.)  
DIAG  
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION  
ENTR  
PREV NEXT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
DIAG AIO  
SET>  
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO  
CAL  
NOTE:  
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the  
TEST CHANNELS  
configured for 0.1V full  
scale should always be  
calibrated manually.  
output to be configured  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: 5V, OVR, NOCAL  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: RANGE: 5V  
SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
Continue pressing SET> until ...  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: AUTO CAL.:ON  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
ENTR accepts  
the new setting.  
Toggle this key to  
turn AUTO CAL  
ON or OFF  
(OFF = manual  
calibration mode).  
DIAG AIO  
ON  
TEST_OUTPUT: AUTO CAL.:ON  
EXIT ignores the  
ENTR EXIT  
new setting  
DIAG AIO  
OFF  
TEST_OUTPUT: AUTO CAL.:OFF  
ENTR EXIT  
05744 Rev B  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.9.2.2. Automatic TEST CHANNEL Calibration  
To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, press:  
NOTE  
Before performing this procedure, make sure that the AUTO CAL feature is turned OFF for CONC_OUT_1  
and CONC_OUT_2,  
Make sure that the AUTO CAL feature is turned ON for the TEST CHANNEL (See Section 6.9.2.1)  
From the  
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU  
(See Section 6.9.1.1.)  
DIAG  
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION  
ENTR  
PREV NEXT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
DIAG AIO  
SET>  
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO  
CAL  
DIAG AIO  
DIAG AIO  
NOT AUTO CAL. CONC_OUT_1  
NOT AUTO CAL. CONC_OUT_2  
This message  
appears when  
AUTO-CAL is  
Turned OFF for  
a channel  
Analyzer  
automatically  
calibrates all  
channels for which  
AUTO-CAL is turned  
ON  
DIAG AIO  
AUTO CALIBRATING TEST_OUTPUT  
If any of the channels have not  
been calibrated ot if at least one  
channel has AUTO-CAL turned  
OFF, this message will read NO.  
DIAG AIO  
AOUTS CALIBRATED: YES  
SET> CAL  
EXIT  
NOTE:  
Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely  
matched to the characteristics of the recording device.  
70  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
To initiate an automatic calibration from inside the TEST CHANNEL submenu, press:  
05744 Rev B  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.9.2.3. Manual Calibration of the TEST CHANNEL configured for Voltage Ranges  
For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated.  
NOTE:  
The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear if the AUTO-CAL feature  
is turned off for the channel being adjusted (see Section6.9.2.1)  
Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals (See Figure 6-2) and by  
changing the actual output signal level using the front panel keys in 100, 10 or 1 count increments.  
V
+DC Gnd  
Figure 6-3:  
Setup for Calibrating the TEST CHANNEL  
Table 6-10: Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration  
MINIMUM  
ADJUSTMENT  
(1 count)  
FULL  
SCALE  
ZERO  
TOLERANCE  
SPAN  
TOLERANCE  
SPAN VOLTAGE  
0.1 VDC  
1 VDC  
±0.0005V  
±0.001V  
±0.002V  
±0.004V  
90 mV  
900 mV  
4500 mV  
4500 mV  
±0.001V  
±0.001V  
±0.003V  
±0.006V  
0.02 mV  
0.24 mV  
1.22 mV  
2.44 mV  
5 VDC  
10 VDC  
72  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
To adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel manually, press:  
From the  
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU  
(See Section 6.9.1.1.)  
DIAG  
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION  
ENTR  
PREV NEXT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
DIAG AIO  
SET>  
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO  
CAL  
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the  
output to be configured  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: 5V, OVR, NOCAL  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: RANGE: 5V  
SET> EDIT  
Continue pressing SET> until ...  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: CALIBRATED:NO  
EXIT  
<SET SET> CAL  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: VOLT-Z: 0 mV  
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT  
These keys increase / decrease  
the analog output signal level  
(not the value on the display)  
by 100, 10 or 1 counts.  
These menu’s  
only appear if  
AUTO-CAL is  
turned OFF  
Continue adjustments until the  
voltage measured at the output  
of the analyzer and/or the input  
of the recording device matches  
the value in the upper right hand  
corner of the display (within the  
tolerances  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: VOLT-S: 4500 mV  
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT  
DIAG AIO  
TEST_OUTPUT: CALIBRATED: YES  
EXIT  
listed in Table 6-10  
<SET SET> CAL  
05744 Rev B  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.9.3. AIN CALIBRATION  
This is the sub-menu calibrates the analyzer’s A-to-D conversion circuitry. This calibration should only be  
necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU, motherboard or power supplies.  
To perform an AIN CALIBRATION, press:  
74  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.10. SETUP MORE VARS: INTERNAL VARIABLES (VARS)  
The M703E has several-user adjustable software variables, which define certain operational parameters.  
Usually, these variables are automatically set by the instrument’s firmware, but can be manually re-defined using  
the VARS menu.  
The following table lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level. See Appendix  
A2 for a detailed listing of all of the M703E variables that are accessible through the remote interface.  
Table 6-11: Variable Names (VARS)  
ALLOWED  
VALUES  
DEFAULT  
VALUES  
NO.  
VARIABLE  
DESCRIPTION  
58ºC  
Warning limits  
Sets the photometer lamp temperature set  
point and warning limits.  
PHOTO_LAMP1,2  
0ºC and 100ºC  
0
56ºC - 61ºC  
48ºC  
Warning limits  
Sets the O3 generator lamp temperature set  
point and warning limits.  
O3_GEN LAMP1,2  
0ºC and 100ºC  
1
43ºC - 53ºC  
Set the upper span point of the O3  
concentration range for TEST CHANNEL  
analog signal O3_PHOTO_CONC.  
0.1–20000 ppb  
500 ppb  
O3_CONC_RANGE  
2
O3 bench control flag.  
ON turns on the photometer pump and  
switches measure/reference valve only  
when the O3 mode is set for BNCH (See  
Section 3.4.5).  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY2  
OFF  
3
4
Internal zero air pump control.  
ZA_PUMP_ENAB2  
ON  
ON turns on internal zero air pump when  
generating ozone.  
Sets the standard Temperature used in  
calculating O3 flow rates and concentrations.  
STD_TEMP1  
0ºC and 100ºC  
29.92 in-Hg-A  
25ºC  
5
6
Sets the standard pressure used in  
calculating O3 flow rates and concentrations.  
15.00 – 50 .00  
in-Hg-A  
STD PRESSURE1  
Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock.  
Choose the + sign if the clock is too slow,  
choose the - sign if the clock is too fast (See  
Section 6.7.2).  
-60 to +60 s/day  
Default=0  
0
CLOCK_ADJ  
7
1 DO NOT ADJUST OR CHANGE these values unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments’ customer service  
personnel.  
2 Only available in calibrators with O3 photometer and generator options installed.  
NOTE:  
There is a 2-second latency period between when a VARS value is changed and the new value is stored  
into the analyzer’s memory.  
DO NOT turn the analyzer off during this period or the new setting will be lost.  
05744 Rev B  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following key sequence:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
EXIT  
COMM VARS DIAG  
SETUP X.X  
ENTER PASSWORD  
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these keys to enter  
the correct PASSWORD  
SETUP X.X  
0) O3_PHOTO_LAMP=58.0 DegC  
EDIT PRNT EXIT  
In all cases:  
EXIT discards the new  
DO NOT CHANGE  
these settings unless  
specifically instructed to by  
Teledyne Instruments’  
Customer Service  
NEXT JUMP  
setting  
ENTR accepts the  
SETUP X.X  
1) O3_PHOT_LAMP=58.0 DegC  
EDIT PRNT EXIT  
personnel  
new setting  
PREV NEXT JUMP  
SETUP X.X  
2) O3_CONC_RANGE=500.0 PPB  
EDIT PRNT EXIT  
PREV NEXT JUMP  
SETUP X.X  
O3_CONC_RANGE=500.0 PPB  
.0 ENTR EXIT  
0
0
5
0
0
Toggle these keys to set  
the upper span point of the  
O3_PHOTO_CONC Test  
Channel signal  
SETUP X.X  
3) O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY=OFF  
PREV NEXT JUMP  
EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY=OFF  
ENTR EXIT  
OFF  
0
Toggle this key turn this  
mode ON / OFF  
SETUP X.X  
4) ZA_PUMP_ENAB=ON  
PREV NEXT JUMP  
EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
ZA_PUMP_ENAB=ON  
ON  
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle this key turn this  
SETUP X.X  
5) STD_TEMP=25.0 DegC  
mode ON / OFF  
DO NOT CHANGE  
these settings unless  
specifically instructed to by  
Teledyne Instruments’  
Customer Service  
PREV NEXT JUMP  
EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
6) STD PRESS=29.92 In-Hg  
personnel  
PREV NEXT JUMP  
EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
7) CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day  
PREV  
JUMP  
EDIT ENTR EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day  
ENTR EXIT  
+
0
0
Enter sign and number of  
seconds per day the clock  
gains (-) or loses(+)  
76  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.11. OPERATING THE M703E CALIBRATOR AS AN O3  
PHOTOMETER  
The M703E can easily be configured to measure an external source of ozone.  
6.11.1. SET UP FOR OPERATING THE M703E AS AN O3  
PHOTOMETER  
To convert the M703E from an O3 calibrator to and O3 photometer:  
1. Remove the two loop-back tubing assemblies on the rear panel connected to the ‘PHOTO IN’ and  
‘PHOTO REF IN’ fittings.  
2. Connect the ozone source to be measured to the ‘PHOTO IN’ fitting.  
This gas must be supplied at atmospheric pressure.  
3. Connect a reference gas (Zero Air) for the photometer to the ‘PHOTO REF IN.’  
This gas must be supplied at atmospheric pressure. To avoid interference effects, the reference gas  
should be from the same source than is being used to feed the ozone generator that is being  
assayed.  
REFERENCE GAS  
SOURCE  
O3 SOURCE TO BE  
MEASURED  
PHOTOMETER INLET  
1
PHOTOMETER OUTLET  
Capped  
PHOTOMETER ZERO IN  
PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT  
EXHAUST line: Max Length=3 meters ( or 10 feet)  
EXHAUST  
ZERO AIR IN  
VENT  
CAL GAS OUT  
CAL GAS OUT  
DRY AIR IN  
Capped  
M703E  
Photometric  
O3 Calibrator  
Minimum input gas flow for  
Photometer is 800 cc3/min  
1
Figure 6-4:  
Set up for Using the M703E to Measure an External O3 Source  
05744 Rev B  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
To use the M703E as a photometer, press:  
78  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.12. SETUP LVL: SETTING UP AND USING LEADS (DASIBI)  
OPERATING LEVELS  
6.12.1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LEADS LEVELS  
The M703E calibrator can be equipped with a version of firmware that includes support for LEADS, a data  
collection and analysis system LEADS specifically designed for handling meteorological and environmental data  
particularly when there is a need to integrate data and control instrumentation from several different  
manufacturers. When an M703E calibrator is equipped with the optional LEADS software is used in conjunction  
with data loggers located central data analysis facility is possible to collect and buffer data between the various  
calibrators, analyzers and metrological equipment remotely located at an air monitoring station.  
Because LEADS was originally developed for use with TNRCC using Dasibi 5008 calibrators, the LEADS  
version of the M703E includes support for Dasibi “Dot” serial data commands and operational “LEVEL’s”.  
NOTE  
For more information on the LEADS system, please go to http://www.meteostar.com/.  
6.12.2. DOT COMMANDS  
The Dasibi “Dot” commands form a text-based (ASCII) data protocol that is transmitted between a control  
computer (XENO data logger in this case) and a calibrator or ambient gas analyzer over an RS-232 connection.  
The details of the protocol are beyond the scope of this document, but in its simplest form the protocol is based  
on a two or three digit integer preceded by a control-A and a period (.) and then followed by a “!” and a two digit  
checksum.  
EXAMPLE:  
^A.xxx!nn  
For further information on dot commands, please contact T-API customer service.  
An M703E equipped with LEADS software can be simultaneously operated over the same COM port using  
standard Teledyne Instruments’ serial data commands and is compatible with APIcom versions 3.7.3 and later  
which include an added feature that allows a user to edit, upload and download level tables.  
05744 Rev B  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.12.3. LEVELS  
A LEVEL is a combination of several parameters:  
An ID number for the LEVEL  
An action, (e.g. GENERATE, STANDBY)  
A target concentration value  
An output flow rate (if applicable)  
Configuration for one or both of two status output blocks.  
Up to twenty levels can be defined and used with the M703E using a range of ID numbers from 0-98. Level 99  
is reserved for standby. Are not time based and do not include characteristics such as start time or duration,  
therefore a single LEVEL can not switch between different concentration levels and flow rates. Separate flow  
and concentration outputs must be programmed into separate LEVELs which are then individually started and  
stopped either by an operator at the calibrator’s front panel or through a serial data operation over the RS-232 or  
Ethernet ports.  
6.12.4. ACTIVATING AN EXISTING LEVEL  
To activate an existing defined LEVEL, press:  
80  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.12.5. PROGRAMMING NEW LEVELS  
To begin programming a new LEVEL find the LVL submenu by pressing:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
LEVL SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE EXIT  
This display only appears if there are no LEVELs currently  
programmed into the M703E.  
OTHERWISE ...  
SETUP X.X  
END OF LEVELS  
INS  
PRNT EXIT  
ENTR EXIT  
SETUP X.X [LEVEL ID] ) [Gas/Conc.], [Status Block Set]  
CHOOSE ACTION Submenu  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE  
PREV NEXT  
Deletes the LEVEL shown  
in the message field  
Edits the LEVEL shown in  
the message field  
Scrolls back and forth between  
Use these keys to scroll though the available  
instructions: GENERATE & MANUAL  
existing LEVELS  
05744 Rev B  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.12.5.1. Creating a GENERATE LEVEL  
To create a LEVEL using the M703E’s AUTO generation function, press:  
Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu  
CHOOSE ACTION Submenu  
SETUP X.X  
ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE  
ENTR EXIT  
PREV NEXT  
SETUP X.X  
GENERATE:ZERO  
ZERO ENTR EXIT  
Toggle this key to scroll  
through the available  
gas types (as  
programmed during  
initial setup.  
SETUP X.X  
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3  
.0 PPB O3  
0
0
0
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle this key to  
to scroll through the  
available units of  
measure  
Toggle these keys  
to set the target  
concentration.  
SETUP X.X  
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3  
PCT O3  
0
.0  
0
0
ENTR EXIT  
EXIT discards the  
new setting  
STANDBY  
0
LEVEL:0  
0
ENTR  
EXIT  
EXIT discards the new  
Toggle these keys until  
LEVEL number  
the designation of the  
existing defined level  
program is reached.  
ENTR accepts the new  
LEVEL number  
82  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
6.12.5.2. Creating a MANUAL LEVEL  
To create a level using the M703E’s MANUAL generation function, press:  
Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu  
CHOOSE ACTION Submenu  
SETUP X.X  
NEXT  
ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE  
ENTR EXIT  
Use the NEXT until ...  
SETUP X.X  
INSERT STEP: MANUAL  
PREV  
ENTR EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
O3 GEN MODE: OFF  
REF: The concentration control  
loop will use the generator’s  
reference detector as input.  
This Key  
Turns the the  
O3 Generator  
OFF/ON  
OFF CNST REF BNCH  
ENTR EXIT  
BNCH: The concentration  
control loop will use the  
photometer bench.  
These keys set a target  
This key sets a CONSTANT drive  
concentration for the O3 Generator  
voltage for the O3 Generator  
SETUP X.X  
O3 GEN SET POINT: 000.0 PPB  
SETUP X.X  
O3 GEN SET POINT: 0.0 MV  
0
0
0
0
.0  
ENTR EXIT  
0
0
0
0
.0  
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these keys  
to set output  
CONCENTRATION  
of the O3 generator  
Toggle these keys  
to set the  
CONSTANT drive  
voltage of the O3  
generator  
STANDBY  
0
LEVEL:0  
EXIT discards the new  
0
ENTR  
EXIT  
setting  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
EXIT discards the new  
Toggle these keys until  
the designation of the  
existing defined level  
program is reached.  
LEVEL number  
ENTR accepts the new  
LEVEL number  
05744 Rev B  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.12.5.3. Editing or Deleting a LEVEL  
To edit or delete an existing LEVEL, press:  
Levels are displayed according to the following Format:  
LEVEL ID: Any number between 0 and 99. This will be the number used to select the level when  
activating / deactivating it, or when editing or deleting it.  
Gas Conc: The concentration setting, in ppb, for the O3 generator to produce.  
Status Block Setting: This will be displayed as two pairs of 1-digit numbers.  
The First pair corresponds to Status Block 1.  
The Second pair corresponds to Status Block 2.  
n each case:  
The left digit will be a number between 1 and 4 representing the binary setting of bits 1 through 4  
and;  
The right digit will be a number between 1 and 4 representing the binary setting of bits 5 through 8.  
84  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
Figure 6-5:  
LEADS Level Display Format  
05744 Rev B  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
6.12.6. CONFIGURING LEVEL STATUS BLOCKS  
There are two STATUS BLOCKS associated with LEADS LEVELS.  
BLOCK 1: This block corresponds to the physical CONTROL OUTPUT connections located on the back  
panel of the M703E (see Figure 3-2, Figure 3-8 and Section 3.2.5).  
BLOCK 2: The second status block does not correspond to any physical output but is used to  
communicate status over the serial data port  
To configure the either of the STATUS BLOCKS, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3 LEVL SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE EXIT  
See  
Figure 6-5  
SETUP X.X [LEVEL ID] )[Gas/Conc.],[Status Block Set’g]  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
Toggle these keys until  
the number of the  
LEVEL to be edited is  
reached.  
SETUP X.X LEVEL NUMBER:12  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
Continue pressing SET> until Desired  
Status Block is reached  
SETUP X.X STATUS BLOCK 2:DISABLED  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X STATUS BLOCK 2:OFF  
EXIT discards the  
OFF  
ENTER EXIT  
new setting  
Toggle this key  
turn the CC input  
ON/OFF  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
SETUP X.X STATUS BLOCK 2:[0]0000000  
<CH CH> [0] ENTER EXIT  
EXIT discards the  
Moves the  
cursor one  
character left or  
right.  
new setting  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON/OFF (0 or 1).  
Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control  
output pins located on the back of the M703E (see Figure 3-2),  
The left most bit is Bit 1, the next bit to the right, bit 2,  
progressing rightward to bit 8  
(see Figure 3-8 for connector pin assignments)  
86  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
7. OPERATING THE M703E OVER THE SERIAL I/O  
PORTS  
7.1. USING THE ANALYSER’S COMMUNICATION PORTS  
The M703E is equipped with two serial communication ports located on the rear panel accessible via 2 DB-9  
connectors on the back panel of the instrument (See Figure 3-2). The COM1 connector is a male DB-9  
connector and the COM2 is a female DB9 connector.  
Both ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with, issue commands to, and receive  
data from the calibrator through an external computer system or terminal.  
The RS-232 port (COM1) can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 multidrop mode (option  
62; See Section 5.2.3 and7.3.  
The COM2 port can be configured for standard RS-232 operation, half-duplex RS-485 communication or  
for access via an LAN by installing the Teledyne Instruments’ Ethernet interface card (see Section 5.2.4  
and 7.5).  
7.1.1. RS-232 DTE AND DCE COMMUNICATION  
RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data  
communication equipment (DCE). Basic data terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are  
always considered DCE devices.  
Electronically, the difference between the DCE & DTE is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data  
Transmit functions.  
DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.  
DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.  
A switch located below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to switch between DTE (for use with  
data terminals) or DCE (for use with modems). Since computers can be either DTE or DCE, check your  
computer to determine which mode to use.  
05744 Rev B  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
7.1.2. COMM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS AND CONNECTOR PIN  
ASSIGNMENTS  
Received from the factory, the calibrator is set up to emulate an RS-232 DCE device.  
RS-232 (COM1): RS-232 (fixed), DB-9 male connector.  
o
o
o
Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud).  
Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.  
Parity: None.  
COM2: RS-232 (configurable to RS 485), DB-9 female connector.  
o
o
o
Baud rate: 115000 bits per second (baud).  
Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.  
Parity: None.  
Female DB-9 (COM2)  
(As seen from outside analyzer)  
Male DB-9 (RS-232)  
(As seen from outside analyzer)  
TXD  
TXD  
GND  
GND  
RXD  
RXD  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6
7
8
9
CTS  
CTS  
RTS  
RTS  
(DTE mode)  
(DTE mode)  
RXD  
GND  
TXD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RTS  
CTS  
(DCE mode)  
Figure 7-1:  
Default Pin Assignments for Back Panel COMM Port connectors (RS-232 DCE & DTE)  
The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10-pin  
connectors on the CPU card, CN3 (COM1) and CN4 (COM2).  
CN3 & CN4  
(Located on CPU card)  
CTS  
RTS  
RXD  
2
4
3
6
5
8
7
10  
1
9
GND  
TXD  
(As seen from inside analyzer)  
Figure 7-2:  
Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port connector (RS-232).  
88  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
Teledyne Instruments offers two mating cables, one of which should be applicable for your use.  
Part number WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows connection of the  
serial ports of most personal computers. Also available as Option 60 (See Section 5.2.1).  
Part number WR000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to the most common  
styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated switches.  
Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional adapters.  
NOTE  
Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate internal wiring  
that makes the link inoperable. Check cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne Instruments  
for pin assignments before using.  
To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there are activity indicators  
just above the RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between the calibrator and a computer or modem, both  
the red and green LEDs should be on.  
If the lights are not lit, use the small switch on the rear panel to switch it between DTE and DCE modes  
If both LEDs are still not illuminated, make sure the cable properly constructed.  
05744 Rev B  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
7.1.3. COMM PORT BAUD RATE  
To select the baud rate of either one of the COM Ports, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
EXIT  
COMM VARS DIAG  
SETUP X.X  
COMMUNICATIONS MENU  
ID  
COM1 COM2  
EXIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 MODE:0  
<SET SET> EDIT  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
Toggle these keys to  
cycle through the  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200  
available Baud rates:  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR EXIT  
300  
1200  
4800  
9600  
19200  
38400  
57600  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200  
ENTR EXIT  
EXIT discards the new  
PREV NEXT  
setting  
115200  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
90  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
7.1.4. COMM PORT COMMUNICATION MODES  
Each of the calibrator’s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different modes, listed in Table  
7-1. As modes are selected, the calibrator sums the Mode ID numbers and displays this combined number on  
the front panel display. For example, if quiet mode (01), computer mode (02) and Multi-Drop-enabled mode (32)  
are selected, the Calibrator would display a combined MODE ID of 35.  
Table 7-1: COMM Port Communication Modes  
MODE1  
QUIET  
ID  
1
DESCRIPTION  
Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the calibrator (such as warning messages)  
to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a  
computer program where such intermittent messages might cause communication  
problems.  
Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them.  
Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is  
communicating with a computer operated control program.  
COMPUTER  
SECURITY  
2
4
When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond. The only  
command that is active is the help screen (? CR).  
When turned on this mode switches the COM port settings  
from  
No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit  
to  
E, 7, 1  
2048  
Even parity; 7 data bits; 1 stop bit  
Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence  
over multidrop mode if both are enabled.  
RS-485  
1024  
32  
MULTIDROP  
PROTOCOL  
Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications  
channel. Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs.  
ENABLE  
MODEM  
Enables to send a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the  
RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate.  
64  
ERROR  
Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.  
CHECKING2  
128  
256  
XON/XOFF  
Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking.  
HANDSHAKE2  
Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data  
transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation  
protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software.  
HARDWARE  
HANDSHAKE  
8
HARDWARE  
FIFO2  
Disables the HARDWARE FIFO (First In – First Out), When FIFO is enabled it  
improves data transfer rate for that COM port.  
512  
COMMAND  
PROMPT  
Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.  
4096  
1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the  
SETUP MORE COMM COM[1 OR 2] MODE menu  
2 The default setting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments’ Customer  
Service personnel.  
Note  
Communication Modes for each COM port must be configured independently.  
05744 Rev B  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Press the following keys to select communication modes for a one of the COMM Ports, such as the following  
example where RS-485 mode is enabled:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
EXIT  
COMM VARS DIAG  
SETUP X.X  
COMMUNICATIONS MENU  
ID  
COM1 COM2  
EXIT  
Combined Mode ID  
displayed here  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 MODE:0  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 QUIET MODE:OFF  
PREV NEXT OFF  
Use the PREV and  
NEXT Keys to  
between the  
available modes  
Continue pressing NEXT until ...  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 RS-485 MODE:OFF  
Activate / Deactivate  
the Selected mode  
by toggling the ON /  
OFF key  
PREV NEXT OFF  
ENTR EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 RS-485 MODE:ON  
EXIT discards the new  
PREV NEXT OFF  
ENTR EXIT  
setting  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
PREV and NEXT Keys to continue selecting other  
COM modes you want to enable or disable  
92  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
7.1.5. COMM PORT TESTING  
The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COM menu. This test sends a string of  
256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is running, the red LED on the rear panel of the  
calibrator should flicker.  
To initiate the test press the following key sequence.  
05744 Rev B  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
7.1.6. MACHINE ID  
Each type of Teledyne Instruments calibrator is configured with a default ID code. The default ID code for all  
M703E calibrators is 700. The ID number is only important if more than one calibrator is connected to the same  
communications channel such as when several calibrators are on the same Ethernet LAN, in a RS-232 multidrop  
chain (See Section 7.3) or operating over a RS-485 network (See Section 7.4). If two calibrators of the same  
model type are used on one channel, the ID codes of one or both of the instruments needs to be changed so  
To edit the instrument’s ID code, press:  
The ID number is only important if more than one calibrator is connected to the same communications channel  
(e.g., a multi-drop setup). Different models of Teledyne Instruments’ calibrators have different default ID  
numbers, but if two calibrators of the same model type are used on one channel (for example, two M703E’s), the  
ID of one instrument needs to be changed.  
The ID can also be used for to identify any one of several calibrators attached to the same network but situated  
in different physical locations.  
94  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
7.1.7. TERMINAL OPERATING MODES  
The M703E can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports. As  
terminals and computers use different communication schemes, the calibrator supports two communicate modes  
specifically designed to interface with these two types of devices.  
Computer mode is used when the calibrator is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface  
program.  
Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a “dumb”  
computer terminal. The commands that are used to operate the calibrator in this mode are listed in Table  
7-2.  
7.1.7.1. Help Commands in Terminal Mode  
Table 7-2: Terminal Mode Software Commands  
COMMAND  
Control-T  
Function  
Switches the calibrator to terminal mode  
(echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF,  
the interface can be used in interactive  
mode with a terminal emulation program.  
Control-C  
Switches the calibrator to computer mode  
(no echo, no edit).  
CR  
A carriage return is required after each  
command line is typed into the  
(carriage return)  
terminal/computer. The command will not  
be sent to the calibrator to be executed until  
this is done. On personal computers, this is  
achieved by pressing the ENTER key.  
BS  
Erases one character to the left of the  
cursor location.  
(backspace)  
ESC  
Erases the entire command line.  
(escape)  
? [ID] CR  
This command prints a complete list of  
available commands along with the  
definitions of their functionality to the  
display device of the terminal or computer  
being used. The ID number of the  
calibrator is only necessary if multiple  
calibrators are on the same  
communications line, such as the multi-  
drop setup.  
Control-C  
Control-P  
Pauses the listing of commands.  
Restarts the listing of commands.  
05744 Rev B  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
7.1.7.2. Command Syntax  
Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID numbers, keywords, data  
values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.  
All Commands follow the syntax:  
X [ID] COMMAND <CR>  
Where  
X
is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command. Allowed designators  
are listed in Table 6-27 and Appendix A-6.  
[ID]  
is the machine identification number (Section 7.1.6). Example: the Command “? 200”  
followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of  
software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 200.  
COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being issued (LIST,  
ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have additional arguments that define  
how the command is to be executed. Press ? <CR> or refer to Appendix A-6 for a list of  
available command designators.  
<CR>  
is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage return (usually  
achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer).  
Table 7-3: Teledyne Instruments Serial I/O Command Types  
COMMAND  
COMMAND TYPE  
Calibration  
Diagnostic  
C
D
L
Logon  
T
Test measurement  
Variable  
V
W
Warning  
7.1.7.3. Data Types  
Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean expressions and text  
strings.  
Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a filter length, etc.  
They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or more digits. For example, +1, -12,  
123 are all valid integers.  
Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They consist of the two  
characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f), which is the ‘C’ programming  
language convention. No plus or minus sign is permitted. For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all  
valid hexadecimal integers.  
96  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
Floating-point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points,  
time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by  
zero or more digits, an optional decimal point and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear  
before or after the decimal point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -  
0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers.  
Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that may assume only two  
values. They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF.  
Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types, such as  
data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers. They consist of a quotation mark,  
followed by one or more printable characters, including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a  
final quotation mark. For example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not  
possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string.  
Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items. When using these  
commands, you must type the entire name of the item; you cannot abbreviate any names.  
7.1.7.4. Status Reporting  
Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS-232 interface (the  
other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic  
format). You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (Section 7.1.4,  
Table 7-1).  
Status reports include warning messages, calibration and diagnostic status messages. Refer to Appendix A-3  
for a list of the possible messages, and this for information on controlling the instrument through the RS-232  
interface.  
General Message Format  
All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line request) are in the format:  
X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE<CRLF>  
Where:  
X
is a command type designator, a single character indicating the message type, as  
shown in the Table 6-27.  
DDD:HH:MM is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It consists of the  
Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour of the day (HH) as a number  
from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a number from 00 to 59.  
[ID]  
is the calibrator ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.  
MESSAGE  
is the message content that may contain warning messages, Test Functions, variable  
values, etc.  
<CRLF>  
is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.  
The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy  
structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was  
issued, hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal  
emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.  
05744 Rev B  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
7.1.7.5. COM Port Password Security  
In order to provide security for remote access of the M703E, a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a  
password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE (Mode  
4, Section 7.1.4). Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled, the following items apply.  
A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.  
If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be achieved with the  
LOGOFF command.  
Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be  
disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.  
If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.  
The following messages will be returned at logon:  
LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given  
LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect  
LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully  
To log on to the M703E calibrator with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type:  
LOGON 940331  
940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable RS232_PASS issued as  
follows:  
V RS232_PASS=NNNNNN  
Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.  
98  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
7.2. REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM  
The M703E can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable between the calibrator’s  
COM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable (available from Teledyne Instruments with part  
number WR0000024).  
Once the cable has been connected, check to make sure:  
The DTE-DCE is in the DCE position.  
The M703E COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem,  
The Modem is designed to operate with an 8-bit word length with one stop bit.  
The MODEM ENABLE communication mode is turned ON (Mode 64, see Section 7.1.4).  
Once this is completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the calibrator.  
The default setting for this feature is  
AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0  
This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long.  
To change this setting press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 MODE:0  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
EXIT  
Continue pressing <SET or SET> until ...  
COMM VARS DIAG  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 PORT INIT:AT Y0 &DO &H &I0  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
COMMUNICATIONS MENU  
<SET SET> EDIT  
ID  
COM1 COM2  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 PORT INIT:AT Y0 &DO &H &I0  
[A] ENTR EXIT  
EXIT discards the  
<CH CH> INS DEL  
The <CH and CH>  
keys move the cursor  
left and right along the  
text string  
new setting  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
The INS and CH> key  
inserts a new  
character before the  
cursor position  
Toggle this key to cycle through the  
available character set:  
The DEL  
deletes  
character at  
the cursor  
position  
Alpha: A-Z (Upper and Lower  
Case);  
Special Characters: space ’ ~ ! # $  
% ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < > | ; : , . / ?  
Numerals: 0-9  
05744 Rev B  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
To Initialize the modem press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
EXIT  
COMM VARS DIAG  
SETUP X.X  
COMMUNICATIONS MENU  
ID  
COM1 COM2  
EXIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
COM1 MODE:0  
<SET SET> EDIT  
Continue pressing <SET or SET> until ...  
SETUP X.X  
COM1: INITIALIZE MODEM  
ENTR EXIT  
<SET SET> INIT  
SETUP X.X  
SETUP X.X  
INITIALIZING MODE  
MODEM INITIALIZED  
Test Runs  
Automatically  
PREV NEXT OFF  
EXIT  
If there is a problem initializing the  
modem the message,  
“MODEM NOT INITIALIZED”  
will appear.  
100  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
7.3. MULTIDROP RS-232 SET UP  
The RS-232 multidrop consists of a printed circuit assembly that plugs onto the CN3, CN4 and CN5 connectors  
of the CPU card and the cabling to connect it to the calibrator’s motherboard. This PCA includes all circuitry  
required to enable your calibrator for multidrop operation. It converts the instrument’s COM1 port to multidrop  
configuration allowing up to eight Teledyne Instruments E-Series calibrators or E-Series analyzers to be  
connected the same I/O port of the host computer.  
Because both of the DB9 connectors on the calibrator’s back panel are needed to construct the multidrop chain,  
COM2 is no longer available for separate RS-232 or RS-485 operation; however, with the addition of an Ethernet  
Option (option 63, See Section5.2.4 and 7.5) the COM2 port is available for communication over a 10BaseT  
LAN.  
JP2  
CPU Card  
Rear Panel  
(as seen from inside)  
Cable to  
Ethernet  
Card  
Multidrop  
PCA  
Cable to  
Motherboard  
Figure 7-3:  
Location of JP2 on RS232-Multidrop PCA (option 62)  
Each calibrator or analyzer in the multidrop chain must have:  
One Teledyne Instruments Option 62 installed.  
One 6’ straight-through, DB9 male DB9 Female cable (Teledyne Instruments P/N WR0000101) is  
required for each calibrator.  
To set up the network, for each instrument:  
4. Turn the instrument on and change its MACHINE ID code to a unique 4-digit number.  
5. Remove the top cover of the instrument and locate JP2 on the multidrop PCA (7-4)  
6. Make sure that the jumpers are in place connection pins 9 10 and 11 12.  
7. If the instrument is to be the last instrument on the chain, make sure a jumper is in place connecting pins  
21 22.  
8. If you are adding an instrument to the end of an already existing chain, do not forget to remove JP2, pins  
21 22 on the multidrop PCA on the instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain.  
9. Close the instrument.  
05744 Rev B  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
10. Using straight-through, DB9 male DB9 Female cables, interconnect the host and the calibrators as  
shown in Figure 6-14.  
NOTE:  
Teledyne Instruments recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and the first instrument  
and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.  
KEY:  
Host  
Female DB9  
RS-232 port  
Male DB9  
TAPI Analyzer  
Last  
INSTRUMENT  
COM2  
CALIBRATOR  
CALIBRATOR  
COM2  
COM2  
COM2  
RS-232  
RS-232  
RS-232  
RS-232  
Make Sure  
Jumper between  
JP2 pins 21 22  
is installed.  
Figure 7-4:  
RS232-Multidrop PCA Host/Calibrator Interconnect Diagram  
102  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
7.4. RS-485 CONFIGURATION OF COM2  
As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communications. This port can be re-configured  
for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port capable of supporting up to 32 instruments with a  
maximum distance between the host and the furthest instrument being 4000 feet. If you require full-duplex or  
isolated operation, please contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.  
To reconfigure COM2 as an RS-285 port set switch 6 of SW1 to the ON position (see Figure 7-6).  
The RS-485 port can be configured with or without a 150 termination resistor. To include the resistor,  
install jumper at position JP3 on the CPU board (see Figure 7-6). To configure COM2 as an un-  
terminated RS-485 port leave JP3 open.  
CN4  
COM2 – RS-232  
CN3  
COM1 – RS-232  
JP3  
CN5  
COM2 – RS-485  
SW1  
Pin 6  
Figure 7-5:  
CPU card Locations of RS-232/485 Switches, Connectors and Jumpers  
05744 Rev B  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
When COM2 is configured for RS-485 operation the port uses the same female DB-9 connector on the back of  
the instrument as when Com2 is configured for RS-232 operation, however, the pin assignments are different.  
Female DB-9 (COM2)  
(As seen from outside analyzer)  
RX/TX-  
GND  
RX/TX+  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(RS-485)  
Figure 7-6:  
Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.  
The signal from this connector is routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to a 6-pin connector on the  
CPU card, CN5.  
CN5  
(Located on CPU card)  
RX/TX  
-
GND  
RX/TX+  
2
1
4
3
6
5
(As seen from inside analyzer)  
Figure 7-7:  
CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.  
104  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
7.5. REMOTE ACCESS VIA THE ETHERNET  
When equipped with the optional Ethernet interface, the calibrator can be connected to any standard 10BaseT  
Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers. The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP  
device on port 3000. This allows a remote computer to connect through the internet to the calibrator using  
APICOM, terminal emulators or other programs.  
The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes and baud rate (115,200  
kBaud) for the COM2 port. Once the Ethernet option is installed and activated, the COM2 submenu is replaced  
by a new submenu, INET. This submenu is used to manage and configure the Ethernet interface with your LAN  
or Internet Server(s).  
The card has four LEDs that are visible on the rear panel of the calibrator, indicating its current operating status.  
Table 7-4: Ethernet Status Indicators  
LED  
LNK (green)  
ACT (yellow)  
TxD (green)  
RxD (yellow)  
FUNCTION  
ON when connection to the LAN is valid.  
Flickers on any activity on the LAN.  
Flickers when the RS-232 port is transmitting data.  
Flickers when the RS-232 port is receiving data.  
7.5.1. ETHERNET CARD COM2 COMMUNICATION MODES AND  
BAUD RATE  
The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes for the COM2 port. The  
baud rate is also automatically set at 115 200 kBaud.  
7.5.2. CONFIGURING THE ETHERNET INTERFACE OPTION USING  
DHCP  
The Ethernet option for you M703E uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) to configure its interface  
with your LAN automatically. This requires your network servers also be running DHCP. The calibrator will do  
this the first time you turn the instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network. Once the  
instrument is connected and turned on, it will appear as an active device on your network without any extra set  
up steps or lengthy procedures.  
NOTE  
It is a good idea to check the INET settings the first time you power up your calibrator after it has been  
physically connected to the LAN/Internet to make sure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the  
appropriate information from you network server(s).  
The Ethernet configuration properties are viewable via the calibrator’s front panel.  
05744 Rev B  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Table 7-5: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties  
PROPERTY  
DEFAULT STATE  
DESCRIPTION  
This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF.  
DHCP STATUS  
On  
Editable  
EDIT key  
disabled when  
DHCP is ON  
INSTRUMENT  
IP ADDRESS  
Configured by  
DHCP  
This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.  
192.168.76.55.) is the address of the calibrator itself.  
EDIT key  
A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP  
GATEWAY IP  
ADDRESS  
Configured by  
DHCP  
disabled when address (e.g. 192.168.76.1.) that is the address of the  
DHCP is ON  
computer used by your LAN to access the Internet.  
Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.  
255.255.252.0) that identifies the LAN to which the device  
is connected.  
EDIT key  
disabled when  
DHCP is ON  
Configured by  
DHCP  
All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must  
have the same subnet mask. Any transmissions sent to  
devices with different subnet masks are assumed to be  
outside of the LAN and are therefore routed through a  
gateway computer onto the Internet.  
SUBNET MASK  
This number defines the terminal control port by which  
the instrument is addressed by terminal emulation  
software, such as Internet or Teledyne Instruments’  
APICOM.  
Editable, but  
DO NOT  
CHANGE  
TCP PORT  
3000  
The name by which your calibrator will appear when  
addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the  
Internet. The default setting for all Teledyne Instruments  
M703E calibrators is “M703E”.  
HOST NAME  
M703E  
Editable  
The host name may be changed to fit customer needs.  
1 Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service  
personnel.  
NOTE  
If the gateway IP, instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes (e.g. “0.0.0.0”), the DCHP was not  
successful in which case you may have to configure the calibrator’s Ethernet properties manually.  
See your network administrator.  
106  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
To view the above properties listed in Table 7-5, press:  
05744 Rev B  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
7.5.2.1. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses  
There are several circumstances when you may need to configure the interface settings of the calibrator’s  
Ethernet card manually. The INET sub-menu may also be used to edit the Ethernet card’s configuration  
properties  
Your LAN is not running a DHCP software package,  
The DHCP software is unable to initialize the calibrator’s interface;  
You wish to program the interface with a specific set of IP addresses that may not be the ones  
automatically chosen by DHCP.  
Editing the Ethernet Interface properties is a two-step process.  
STEP 1: Turn DHCP OFF: While DHCP is turned ON, the ability to set INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP and  
SUBNET MASK manually is disabled  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
COMM VARS DIAG  
SETUP X.X  
COMMUNICATIONS MENU  
ID ADDR INET  
SETUP X.X  
ENTER PASSWORD:818  
ENTR EXIT  
8
1
8
SETUP X.X  
DHCP:ON  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
ON  
DHCP:ON  
Toggle this key  
to turn DHCP  
ON/OFF  
ENTR EXIT  
ENTR EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
OFF  
DHCP:OFF  
ENTR accepts  
the new setting  
EXIT ignores the  
new setting  
Continue to Step 2 Below  
108  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
STEP 2: Configure the INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK addresses by pressing:  
Internet Configuration Keypad Functions  
From Step 1 above)  
KEY  
[0]  
FUNCTION  
Press this key to cycle through the range of  
numerals and available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”)  
<CH CH>  
DEL  
Moves the cursor one character left or right.  
Deletes a character at the cursor location.  
SETUP X.X  
DHCP: OFF  
Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous  
menu.  
ENTR  
EXIT  
SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous  
menu.  
Some keys only appear as needed.  
SETUP X.X INST IP: 000.000.000.000  
<SET SET> EDIT  
Cursor  
location is  
indicated by  
brackets  
SETUP X.X INST IP: [0] 00.000.000  
<CH CH>  
DEL [0]  
ENTR EXIT  
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000  
<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT  
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0  
<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT  
SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000  
<SET  
EDIT  
EXIT  
The PORT number needs to remain at 3000.  
Do not change this setting unless instructed to by  
Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel.  
Pressing EXIT from  
any of the above  
display menus  
causes the Ethernet  
option to reinitialize  
its internal interface  
firmware  
SETUP X.X  
INITIALIZING INET 0%  
INITIALIZING INET 100%  
SETUP X.X  
INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED  
SETUP X.X  
INITIALIZATION FAILED  
Contact your IT  
Network Administrator  
SETUP X.X  
COMMUNICATIONS MENU  
ID  
INET  
COM1  
EXIT  
05744 Rev B  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
7.5.3. CHANGING THE CALIBRATOR’S HOSTNAME  
The HOSTNAME is the name by which the calibrator appears on your network. The default name for all  
Teledyne Instruments M703E calibrators is M703E. To change this name (particularly if you have more than  
one M703E calibrator on your network), press.  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
SETUP X.X  
ENTER PASSWORD:818  
ENTR EXIT  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
8
1
8
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
SETUP X.X  
DHCP:ON  
COMM VARS DIAG  
EXIT  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
COMMUNICATIONS MENU  
ID ADDR INET  
EXIT  
Continue pressing SET> until ...  
SETUP X.X  
HOSTNAME: TMS 9000  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
HOSTNAME: TMS 9000  
KEY  
FUNCTION  
Moves the cursor one character to the left.  
<CH  
CH>  
INS  
<CH CH> INS DEL  
[?]  
ENTR EXIT  
Moves the cursor one character to the right.  
Inserts a character before the cursor location.  
Deletes a character at the cursor location.  
DEL  
Press this key to cycle through the range of  
numerals and characters available for  
insertion. 0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * (  
) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?  
Use these key to edit the HOSTNAME  
[?]  
Accepts the new setting and returns to the  
previous menu.  
ENTR  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
HOSTNAME: TMS 9K–STACK 2  
[?] ENTR EXIT  
Ignores the new setting and returns to the  
previous menu.  
<CH CH> INS DEL  
ENTR accepts  
the new setting  
EXIT ignores the  
new setting  
Some keys only appear as needed.  
SETUP X.X  
INITIALIZING INET 0%  
INITIALIZATION process proceeds  
automatically  
SETUP X.X  
INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED  
SETUP X.X  
INITIALIZATION FAILED  
SETUP X.X  
COMMUNICATIONS MENU  
Contact your  
IT Network  
ID ADDR INET  
EXIT  
Administrator  
110  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
7.6. APICOM REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAM  
APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows the user to access and control any of  
Teledyne Instruments’ main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from a remote connection through direct  
cable, modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a user can:  
Establish a link from a remote location to the M703E through direct cable connection via RS-232 modem  
or Ethernet.  
View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed when  
standing in front of the instrument.  
Remotely edit system parameters and set points.  
Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.  
Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload iDAS configurations.  
Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control.  
APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and trouble-shooting. Figure 7-8 shows  
examples of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front  
panel  
Figure 7-8:  
APICOM Remote Control Program Interface  
NOTE  
APICOM is included free of cost with the calibrator and the latest versions can also be downloaded for  
free at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.  
The M703E calibrator is fully supported by APICOM revision 3.9.4 and later.  
Instruments with the LEADS support option must run APICOM revision 4.0 and later  
05744 Rev B  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES:  
112  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
8. M703E CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION  
Basic electronic calibration of the M703E Calibrator is performed at the factory. Normally there is no need to  
perform this factory calibration in the field however, the performance of several of the instruments key  
subsystems should be verified periodically and if necessary adjusted. These subsystems are:  
O3 Photometer: The O3 photometer performance should be periodically verified against an external  
standard (see Section 8.1).  
O3 Generator: The O3 generator should be periodically calibrated (see Section 8.2).  
8.1. VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE M703E’S O3  
PHOTOMETER  
The accuracy of calibration gas produced by the M703E depends entirely on the accuracy of the photometer;  
therefore, it is very important that the photometer is operating properly and accurately.  
The verification procedure can be performed using the instruments internal O3 generator (see Figure 8-1) or an  
external source of O3 (see Figure 8-2). In either case, an external source of zero air (such as a Teledyne  
Instruments’ Model 701 Zero Air Generator) is required.  
8.1.1. SETUP FOR VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE O3  
PHOTOMETER  
Note  
This operation requires an external reference photometer.  
05744 Rev B  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Figure 8-1:  
Set up for Verifying Optional O3 Photometer Using Internal O3 Generator  
Figure 8-2:  
Set up for Verifying Optional O3 Photometer Using an External O3 Generator  
NOTE  
The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are oriented to simplify the drawing.  
All unused ports should be capped.  
A Minimum of 1.1 LPM is required for the external zero air source  
8.1.1.1. Calibration Manifold Exhaust/Vent Line  
The manifold’s excess gas should be vented to a suitable vent outside of the room. This vent should be of large  
enough internal diameter to avoid any appreciable pressure drop, and it must be located sufficiently downstream  
of the output ports to assure that no ambient air enters the manifold due to eddy currents or back diffusion.  
NOTE  
It is recommended that the calibration manifold’s exhaust vent have a minimum internal diameter of 3/8  
inch and a maximum length of 3 meters (or 10 feet)  
114  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
8.1.2. VERIFYING O3 PHOTOMETER PERFORMANCE  
To verify the performance of the M703E’s optional internal photometer perform the following steps:  
STANDBY  
ACT=STANDBY  
Make sure that the  
M703E is in  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
STANDBY mode  
STANDBY  
AUTO  
SYSTEM RESET  
STANDBY  
GENERATE:ZERO  
ZERO ENTR SETUP  
Toggle this key to  
switch to O3  
generation mode  
STANDBY  
0
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3  
PPB O3  
0
4
0
0
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these keys  
to set the target  
concentration.  
Toggle this key to  
set the units of  
measure.  
STANDBY  
0
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3  
PPB O3  
0
0
ENTR EXIT  
GENERATE  
ACT = 400 PPB O3  
Wait  
A MINIMUM  
OF  
<SET SET> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
10 MINUTES  
or until the  
ACT reading  
settles down  
Record O3 concentration readings displayed by the ACT  
test function and by the external reference photometer  
Repeat this procedure for as many points along the  
performance range of the M703E as required  
NOTE  
The readings recorded from the M703E’s ACT test function and the external reference photometer  
should be within 1% of each other.  
05744 Rev B  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
8.1.3. CALIBRATING THE O3 PHOTOMETER  
The following procedure sets values held in the calibrator’s memory of for zero point OFFSET and SLOPE.  
8.1.3.1. Photometer Zero Calibration  
To set the zero point offset for the M703E Photometric Calibrator’s photometer, press:  
116  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
8.1.3.2. Photometer Span Calibration  
To set the response SLOPE for the M703E Photometric Calibrator’s photometer, press:  
05744 Rev B  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
8.1.4. O3 PHOTOMETER DARK CALIBRATION  
The Dark Calibration Test turns off the Photometer UV Lamp and records any offset signal level of the UV  
Detector-Preamp-Voltage to Frequency Converter circuitry. This allows the instrument to compensate for any  
voltage levels inherent in the Photometer detection circuit that might affect the output of the detector circuitry and  
therefore the calculation of O3 concentration.  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
O3 GAS CONFIG  
MODE ADJ PHOT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
O3 GAS CONFIG  
BCAL DARK  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SETUP X.X  
CALIBRATING DARK OFFSET  
DARK CAL 34% COMPLETE  
The DARK CAL procedure progresses automatically  
until ...  
Yes  
DARK CAL  
Successful?  
No  
SETUP X.X INVALID DARK CAL OFFS=XXXX.X MV  
118  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
8.2. CALIBRATING THE O3 GENERATOR  
The M703E calibrator’s software includes a routine for automatically calibrating the O3 generator. A calibration  
table of drive voltages stored in the M703E’s memory is the basis for this calibration. This table is used by the  
M703E to set initial O3 generator drive settings.  
8.2.1. O3 GENERATOR CALIBRATION TABLE  
When the M703E is operated in BENCH mode, this table is used for the initial setting only. After a short delay  
time, the bench feedback control will take over and control the O3 generator drive to servo in to the exact  
concentration requested.  
When the M703E is operated in CONST mode, the initial O3 generator drive setting will be set by the calibration  
table and does not change.  
When the M703E is operated in REF mode, the calibration table sets the initial drive setting and then the  
reference detector feedback takes over to maintain the lamp at a constant intensity as measured by the  
reference detector. The target value for the reference detector for a particular target concentration is also stored  
in this calibration table.  
The instrument software will interpolate between two values in the table when an intermediate concentration is  
requested.  
For each point included in the table used by the M703E to calibrate the optional O3 generator the user can set a  
drive voltage and a dwell time for that point. Each point can also be individually turned off or on.  
05744 Rev B  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
8.2.2. VIEWING O3 GENERATOR CALIBRATION POINTS  
To view these calibration points, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
COMM VARS DIAG  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
ENTER PASSWORD  
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these keys to enter  
the correct PASSWORD  
DIAG  
SIGNAL I/O  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR EXIT  
Continue pressing NEXT until ...  
DIAG  
O3 GEN CALIBRATION  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR  
EXIT  
EXIT  
DIAG  
O3 GEN CALIBRATION  
CAL PNTS  
DIAG O3GEN  
1) 500 MV, 5.0 MIN, ON  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
Toggle these keys to move  
between calibration points  
120  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
8.2.3. ADDING OR EDITING O3 GENERATOR CALIBRATION  
POINTS  
To add a calibration point to the table or edit an existing point, press:  
05744 Rev B  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
8.2.4. DELETING O3 GENERATOR CALIBRATION POINTS  
To delete an existing calibration point, press:  
122  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
8.2.5. TURNING O3 GENERATOR CALIBRATION POINTS ON / OFF  
To enable or disable an existing calibration point, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
COMM VARS DIAG  
Continue pressing NEXT until ...  
SETUP X.X  
ENTER PASSWORD  
DIAG  
O3 GEN CALIBRATION  
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR  
EXIT  
EXIT  
Toggle these keys to enter  
the correct PASSWORD  
DIAG  
O3 GEN CALIBRATION  
DIAG  
SIGNAL I/O  
CAL PNTS  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR EXIT  
DIAG O3GEN  
1) 500 MV, 5.0 MIN, ON  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
Continue pressing PREV & NEXT until your  
reach the point to be turned ON/OFF  
DIAG O3GEN  
8) 1500 MV, 5.0 MIN, ON  
PREV NEXT  
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT  
DIAG O3GEN  
CAL. POINT DRIVE:0 MV  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
Continue pressing SET> until ...  
DIAG O3GEN  
CAL. POINT ENABLELD:ON  
<SET SET> EDIT  
EXIT  
DIAG O3GEN  
CAL. POINT ENABLELD:ON  
EXIT discards  
the new setting  
ON  
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle this key to turn the  
point ON / OFF  
ENTR accepts  
the new setting  
05744 Rev B  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
8.2.6. PERFORMING AN AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OF THE O3  
GENERATOR  
To run the automatic O3 generator calibration program, press:  
124  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
8.3. M703E GAS PRESSURE SENSOR CALIBRATION  
The M703E Calibrator has two sensors that monitor the pressure of the gases flowing through the instrument.  
The data collected by these sensors is used to compensate the final concentration calculations for changes in  
atmospheric pressure and is stored in the CPU’s memory as test functions:  
Table 8-1: M703E Pressure Sensors  
ASSOCIATED  
TEST FUNCTION  
PRESSURE MONITOR  
MEASUREMENT POINT  
SENSOR  
UNITS  
PSIG  
Regulator Pressure Sensor  
Capped fitting on backside of regulator  
assembly. See Figure 8-4  
REG PRESSURE  
Use monitor to measure ambient  
atmospheric pressure at the calibrator’s  
location.  
Photometer Sample Gas  
Pressure Sensor  
PHOTO SPRESS  
IN-HG-A  
8.3.1.1. Gas Pressure Sensor Calibration Set Up  
The procedures described in this section require an independent, calibrated pressure meter/monitor be attached  
at the following location.  
M703E Chassis  
PHOTOMETER BENCH  
Pressure  
Monitor  
DRY AIR  
IN  
O3 GAS INPUT  
PRESSURE SENSOR  
Filter  
PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE SENSOR  
Pressure  
Regulator  
On Back Panel  
O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA  
PHOTOMETER  
INLET  
REF/MEAS  
Valve  
Flow Control  
(800 cm3)  
PHOTOMETER  
ZERO IN  
PUMP  
EXHAUST  
ZERO AIR  
IN  
PUMP  
PHOTOMETER  
ZERO OUT  
INTERNAL  
VENT  
PHOTOMETER  
OUTLET  
TO ANALYZER  
TO ANALYZER  
VENT  
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD  
Figure 8-3:  
Pressure Calibration Monitor Points  
05744 Rev B  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Attach Pressure  
Monitor Here  
Outlets to  
O3 Generator  
Pressure  
Regulator  
Figure 8-4:  
O3 Generator Pressure Monitor Point Physical Location– M703E  
126  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
8.3.2. CALIBRATING THE REGULATOR AND PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE SENSORS  
1. Turn off the calibrator and open the top cover.  
2. Connect a pressure meter to the Regulator Pressure measurement fitting. This fitting is located on the  
backside of the regulator assembly (see Figure 8-4).  
3. Turn on the calibrator and perform the following steps:  
4. Turn OFF the M703E, remove the pressure monitor, replace the cap on the pressure measurement  
fitting.  
05744 Rev B  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
8.4. M703E GAS FLOW CALIBRATION  
The M703E has two gas flow characteristics that affect its performance: the flow of gas thought the sample  
chamber of the instrument’s photometer and the total gas flow being output. While both are stored in the  
calibrator’s memory and used to compensate the final concentration calculations for changes in atmospheric  
pressure, they are calculated quite differently.  
PHOTOMETER SAMPLE GAS FLOW RATE:  
This flow rate is measured directly by a flow sensor located pressure / flow sensor PCA. A slope factor, stored  
in the calibrator’s memory the last time a PHOTO FLOW calibration operation (see Section 8.4.1) was  
performed, is and applied to the reading from that sensor.  
The calculated photometer sample gas flow value is viewable on the instrument’s front panel using the PHOTO  
FLOW test function and can be output via the M703E’s TEST CHANNEL output using the SAMPLE FLOW  
function.  
OUTPUT GAS FLOW RATE:  
This flow rate is calculated by applying a separate slope factor, also stored in the calibrator’s memory, to an  
interpolated valued based on the following table of internal gas pressure as measured by the O3 gas input  
pressure sensor. The output-flow slope value is determined by performing an OUPUT FLOW calibration  
operation (see Section 8.4.2).  
Table 8-2: M703E Gas Pressure to Output Flow conversion Table  
M703E REGULATOR PRESSURE TO OUTPUT FLOW  
PSIG  
0
LPM  
0.000  
0.676  
1.214  
1.659  
2.071  
2.463  
2.816  
3.178  
3.536  
3.851  
4.166  
5.744  
7.282  
8.755  
10.254  
11.695  
13.146  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
15  
20  
25  
30  
35  
40  
The calculated OUTPUT FLOW value is viewable on the instrument’s front panel using the OUTPUT FLOW test  
function and can be output via the M703E’s TEST CHANNEL using the OUTPUT FLOW function.  
128  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
8.4.1. CALIBRATING THE PHOTOMETER’S SAMPLE GAS FLOW  
NOTE  
The procedure described in this section requires an independent, calibrated gas flow meter/monitor be  
connected to the EXHAUST fitting on the back of the M703E.  
During the PHOTO FLOW calibration, the M703E software automatically turns the DC pump downstream from  
the photometer ON.  
To perform a PHOTO FLOW calibration, press:  
05744 Rev B  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
8.4.2. CALIBRATING THE OUTPUT GAS FLOW  
8.4.2.1. Output Gas Flow Set Up  
The procedure described in this section requires an independent, calibrated flow meter/monitor and the following  
set up:  
Figure 8-5:  
Output Flow Calibration Monitor Point  
130  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
8.4.2.2. Performing an Output Gas Flow Calibration  
During the PHOTO FLOW calibration, the M703E software automatically turns the DC pump downstream from  
the photometer OFF and the AC dry air pump ON. To perform a PHOTO FLOW calibration, press:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
An external flow  
meter is needed to  
perform this  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
operation.  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
EXIT  
COMM VARS DIAG  
SETUP X.X  
ENTER PASSWORD  
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these keys to enter  
the correct PASSWORD  
DIAG  
SIGNAL I/O  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR EXIT  
Continue pressing NEXT until ...  
DIAG  
FLOW CALIBRATION  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR  
EXIT  
DIAG FCAL  
WAITING FOR FLOW  
DIAG FCAL ACTUAL PHOTO FLOW: 1.000 LPM  
.0 ENTR EXIT  
DON NOT press the ENTR button  
at this point.  
1
0
0
0
Doing so will cause the slope  
applied to the Output Flow reading  
be recalculated.  
DIAG FCAL  
WAITING FOR FLOW  
DIAG FCAL ACTUAL OUTPUT FLOW: 1.000 LPM  
.0 ENTR EXIT  
1
0
0
0
EXIT discards the new  
Toggle these keys to  
match the actual flow as  
measured by the external  
flow meter  
setting  
ENTR accepts the  
new setting  
05744 Rev B  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibration and Verification  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES:  
132  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
TECHNICAL INFORMATION  
SECTION III  
TECHNICAL INFORMATION  
05744 Rev B  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
TECHNICAL INFORMATION  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES:  
134  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
9. THEORY OF OPERATION  
9.1. PNEUMATIC OPERATION  
9.1.1. GAS FLOW CONTROL  
Gas flow rates are set by various flow control assemblies located in the gas stream(s).  
9.1.1.1. Flow Control Assemblies  
Figure 9-1:  
Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies  
9.1.1.2. Photometer Critical Flow Orifice  
Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates. They operate without moving  
parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a  
pressure differential is created. This pressure differential combined with the action of the calibrator’s pump  
draws the gas through the orifice.  
As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop, the speed that the gas  
flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is  
greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio  
05744 Rev B  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
stays at least 2:1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream pressure  
because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the  
sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice.  
The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends on the size and shape of  
the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas molecules, moving at the speed of sound, pass  
through the orifice.  
9.1.2. INTERNAL GAS PRESSURE SENSORS  
There are two pressure sensors in the M703E. See Figure 3-3 for the location of the Pressure/Flow PCA.  
A 100 psig pressure sensor on this PCA is used to monitor the downstream regulator pressure. This value is  
displayed on the front panel as a test measurement called REG PRESSURE.  
A second pressure located on the rear PCA measures the pressure of gas in the photometer’s absorption tube.  
This sensor is a 0-15 psia (absolute pressure) range sensor. This data is used by the CPU when calculating the  
O3 concentration inside the absorption tube. This value is displayed on the front panel as a test measurement  
called PHOTO SPRESS. Note that this value is converted to units of Inches of Mercury (IN-HG-A) when  
displayed on the front panel.  
136  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
9.2. ELECTRONIC OPERATION  
9.2.1. OVERVIEW  
Analog Outputs  
TEST  
Status Outputs  
1 - 8  
CHANNEL  
OUTPUT  
Aout 4  
Aout 3  
Aout 2  
Aout 1  
Optional  
Multidrop  
Card  
COM  
1
Control Outputs  
1 - 12  
COM  
2
Control Inputs  
1 - 12  
Optional  
Ethernet  
Card  
Analog Outputs  
(D/A)  
External Digital I/O  
RS-232  
or RS-485  
Power Up  
Circuit  
O3 Generator Input  
Pressure Sensor  
PC 104  
CPU Card  
RS-232  
Disk on  
Chip  
Photometer Sample Gas  
Pressure Sensor  
PC 104 Bus  
Flash  
Chip  
Box  
Temperature  
CPU  
Status  
LED  
Photometer  
M/R Valve  
(Optional)  
I2C Bus  
Thermistor Interface  
Photometer  
Lamp Heater  
O3 Generator  
RELAY  
PCA  
O3 Generator  
Reference  
Detector  
UV  
Lamp  
O3 Generator  
Lamp Heater  
O3 Generator  
UV Lamp  
Temperature  
Photometer  
UV Lamp  
Temperature  
I2C  
Status  
LED  
O3 Generator  
Lamp Supply  
Photometer  
Pump  
Photometer Sample Gas  
Temperature  
Keyboard  
& Display  
Absorption tube  
Photometer  
Lamp Power  
Supply  
Photometer  
Detector  
Preamp  
Photometer  
Detector  
Figure 9-2:  
M703E Electronic Block Diagram  
At its heart, the calibrator is a microcomputer (CPU) that controls various internal processes, interprets data,  
makes calculations, and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne Instruments. It  
communicates with the user as well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral  
devices via a separate printed circuit assembly called the Mother Board.  
The motherboard collects data, performs signal conditioning duties and routs incoming and outgoing signals  
between the CPU and the calibrator’s other major components.  
Data is generated by the various sub components of the M703E (e.g. flow data from the MFC’s, O3  
concentration from the optional photometer). Analog signals are converted into digital data by a unipolar,  
analog-to-digital converter, located on the motherboard.  
05744 Rev B  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the calibrator’s major components, again  
through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard. These status reports are used as data for the  
concentration calculations and as trigger events for certain control commands issued by the CPU. They are  
stored in memory by the CPU and in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display.  
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of manners:  
Through the calibrator’s keyboard and vacuum florescent display over a clocked, digital, serial I/O bus  
(using a protocol called I2C);  
RS 232 & RS485 serial I/O channels;  
Via an optional Ethernet communications card:  
Various digital and analog outputs, and  
A set of digital control input channels.  
Finally, the CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches (also over the I2C bus) located on a  
separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters,  
motors and valves.  
9.2.2. CPU  
The CPU is a low power (5 VDC, 0.8A max), high performance, 386-based microcomputer running a version of  
the DOS operating system. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC-104 specification, version 2.3 for  
embedded PC and PC/AT applications. It has 2 MB of DRAM memory on board and operates at 40 MHz clock  
rate over an internal, 32-bit data and address bus. Chip to chip data handling is performed by two 4-channel,  
direct memory access (DMA) devices over data busses of either 8-bit or 16-bit bandwidth. The CPU supports  
both RS-232 and RS-485 serial protocols. Figure 9-3 shows the CPU board.  
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of ways:  
Through the calibrator’s keyboard and vacuum fluorescence display over a clocked, digital, serial I/O bus  
using the I2C protocol (read I-square-C bus)  
RS-232 and/or RS-485 serial ports (one of which can be connected to an Ethernet converter)  
Various analog voltage and current outputs  
Several digital I/O channels  
Figure 9-3:  
M703E CPU Board Annotated  
138  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
Finally, the CPU issues commands (also over the I2C bus) to a series of relays and switches located on a  
separate printed circuit assembly, the relay board (located in the right rear of the chassis on its own mounting  
bracket) to control the function of heaters and valves. The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage,  
one disk-on-chip and one or two flash chips.  
9.2.2.1. Disk On Chip  
Technically, the disk-on-chip is an EEPROM, but appears to the CPU as, behaves as, and performs the same  
functions in the system as an 8 mb disk drive, internally labeled as DOS drive C:\. It is used to store the  
computer’s operating system files, the Teledyne Instruments firmware and peripheral files, and the operational  
data generated by the calibrator’s internal data acquisition system.  
9.2.2.2. Flash Chip  
The flash chip is another, smaller EEPROM with about 64 kb of space, internally labeled as DOS drive B:\. The  
M703E CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips. The M703E standard configuration is  
one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity, which is used to store the calibrator configuration as created during final  
checkout at the factory. Separating these data onto a less frequently accessed chip significantly decreases the  
chance of data corruption through drive failure.  
In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the calibrator will continue to operate with just the DOC.  
However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring the unit to be recalibrated.  
05744 Rev B  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
9.2.3. RELAY PCA  
The relay board is one of the central switching and power distribution units of the calibrator. It contains power  
relays, valve drivers and status LEDs for all heated zones and valves, as well as thermocouple amplifiers, power  
distribution connectors and the two switching power supplies of the calibrator. The relay board communicates  
with the motherboard over the I2C bus. Its status indicators and components can be used for troubleshooting  
power problems and valve or heater functionality.  
Generally, the relay PCA is located in the right-rear quadrant of the calibrator and is mounted vertically on the  
backside of the same bracket as the instrument’s DC power supplies, however the exact location of the relay  
PCA may differ from model to model (see Figure 3-3.)  
Watchdog  
Status LED (D1)  
DC Power Supply  
Test Points  
Status LED’s  
(D2 through D16)  
I2C Connector  
Power  
Connections  
for DC  
DC Valve &  
Photometer  
Pump  
Heaters  
Control  
AC Pump  
Configuration  
Plug  
DC  
Valve Control  
Drivers  
AC Power  
OUT to Dry  
Air Pump  
DC Valve &  
Photometer  
Pump Control  
Connector  
AC Power  
IN  
DC Power  
Distribution  
Connectors  
Dry Air AC Pump  
Control Relay  
Figure 9-4:  
Relay Board PCA with AC Relay Retainer Removed  
This version of the Relay PCA include one AC relays that controls the AC-powered Dry Air (zero air) pump and  
A plastic insulating safety shield covers the remaining empty AC Relay sockets.  
CAUTION  
NEVER REMOVE THIS SAFETY SHIELD WHILE THE INSTRUMENT IS PLUGGED IN AND  
TURNED ON. THE CONTACTS OF THE AC RELAY SOCKETS BENEATH THE SHIELD  
CARRY HIGH AC VOLTAGES EVEN WHEN NO RELAYS ARE PRESENT  
140  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
9.2.3.1. Valve Control  
The relay board also hosts two valve driver IC's, each of which can drive up four valves. In the M703E, the relay  
PCA controls only those valves associated with the O3 generator and photometer options.  
9.2.3.2. Heater Control  
The relay PCA controls the DC heaters for the O3 generator and photometer lamp housing.  
Figure 9-5:  
Heater Control Loop Block Diagram.  
9.2.3.3. Relay PCA Status LEDs & Watch Dog Circuitry  
Thirteen LEDs are located on the calibrator’s relay board to indicate the status of the calibrator’s heating zones  
and some of its valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator. Table 11-2 shows the states of these  
LEDs and their respective functionality.  
D9 (Green) – Photometer Pump Status  
D7 (Green) Photometer Meas/Ref Valve  
D6 (Green ) – Ext. Zero Air Valve  
D15 (Yellow) - Photometer Lamp Heater  
D16 (Yellow) – O3 Generator Lamp Heater  
D1 (RED)  
Watchdog  
Indicator  
Figure 9-6:  
Status LED Locations – Relay PCA  
05744 Rev B  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Table 9-1: Relay Board Status LEDs  
LED  
COLOR  
Red  
DESCRIPTION  
Watchdog Circuit; I2C bus  
operation.  
FUNCTION  
D1  
Blinks when I2C bus is operating properly  
D2  
Yellow  
Dry Air Pump Status  
When lit the zero air AC pump is running.  
D3-6  
SPARE  
When lit the valve open to REFERENCE  
gas path  
D7  
D8  
Green  
Green  
Photometer Meas/Ref Valve  
SPARE  
When lit the External Zero Air valve is  
open  
D9  
Ext. Zero Air valve Status  
D10 - 14  
D15  
SPARE  
When lit the photometer UV lamp heater  
is on  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Photometer Heater Status  
O3 Generator Lamp Heater  
When lit the O3 generator UV lamp heater  
is on  
D16  
9.2.3.4. Relay PCA Watchdog Indicator (D1)  
The most important of the status LEDs on the relay board is the red I2C Bus watchdog LED. It is controlled  
directly by the calibrator’s CPU over the I2C bus. Special circuitry on the relay PCA watches the status of D1.  
Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds (indicating that the CPU or I2C bus has stopped  
functioning) this Watchdog Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turns off all heaters and lamps.  
142  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
9.2.4. MOTHERBOARD  
This is the largest electronic assembly in the calibrator and is mounted to the rear panel as the base for the CPU  
board and all I/O connectors. This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A/D  
conversion, digital input/output, PC-104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass  
through for the RS-232 and RS-485 signals.  
9.2.4.1. A to D Conversion  
Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the calibrator’s various sensors, are converted into digital  
signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter (A/D).Under the control of  
the CPU, this functional block selects a particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital  
word.  
The A/D consists of a voltage-to-frequency (V-F) converter, a programmable logic device (PLD), three  
multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices. The V-F converter produces a frequency  
proportional to its input voltage. The PLD counts the output of the V-F converter during a specified time period,  
and sends the result of that count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU.  
The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the M703E it is used in uni-polar  
mode with a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and under-range. This allows signals from -0.05V  
to +5.05V to be fully converted.  
For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter: Reference ground and  
+4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the  
CPU. The CPU uses these values to compute the converter’s offset and slope and also uses these factors for  
subsequent conversions.  
9.2.4.2. Sensor Inputs  
The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D converter through the master multiplexer from two  
connectors on the motherboard. Terminating resistors (100 k) on each of the inputs prevent cross talk  
between the sensor signals.  
9.2.4.3. Thermistor Interface  
This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negative-coefficient, thermistors  
(temperature sensors) located inside the calibrator.  
9.2.4.4. Analog Outputs  
The M703E calibrator comes equipped with one analog output. It can be set by the user to carry the current  
signal level of any one of the parameters (see Table 7-4) and will output an analog VDC signal that rises and  
falls in relationship with the value of the parameter.  
05744 Rev B  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
9.2.4.5. External Digital I/O  
The external digital I/O performs two functions.  
The STATUS outputs carry logic-level (5V) signals through an optically isolated 8-pin connector on the rear  
panel of the calibrator. These outputs convey on/off information about certain calibrator conditions such as  
CONC VALID. They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices.  
The CONTROL outputs can be used to initiate actions by external peripheral devices in conjunction with  
individual steps of a calibration sequence (see Section 6.5.1.6).  
The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external source such as a PLC or data  
logger (Section 6.5.1.5). Zero and span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel.  
9.2.4.6. I2C Data Bus  
I2C is a two-wire, clocked, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic  
systems. A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The  
data are then fed to the keyboard/display interface and finally onto the relay board.  
Interface circuits on the keyboard/display interface and relay board convert the I2C data to parallel inputs and  
outputs. An additional interrupt line from the keyboard to the motherboard allows the CPU to recognize and  
service key strokes on the keyboard.  
9.2.4.7. Power-up Circuit  
This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during calibrator start-up and sets the analog outputs, external digital  
I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish  
control.  
144  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
9.2.5. POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER  
The M703E calibrator operates in two main AC power ranges: 100-120 VAC and 220-240 VAC (both ± 10%)  
between 47 and 63 Hz. A 5 ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF switch. In case of a wiring fault or  
incorrect supply power, the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the calibrator.  
NOTE:  
The M703E calibrator is equipped with a universal power supply that allows it to accept any AC power  
configuration, within the limits specified in Table 2-2.  
CAUTION  
Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing this situation before  
turning the calibrator back on.  
SENSOR SUITES  
KEY  
Sensor Control  
& I/O Logic  
ANALOG SENSORS  
AC POWER  
DC POWER  
O3 Generator  
Reference detector,  
LOGIC DEVICES  
Pre-Amplifiers  
& Amplifiers  
Photometer UV  
Detector  
(e.g. CPU, I2C bus,  
Keyboard, Display,  
MotherBoard, etc.)  
AC  
POWER IN  
PS 1  
GAS  
TEMPERATURE  
SENSORS  
+5 VDC  
ON / OFF  
SWITCH  
±15 VDC  
GAS  
PRESSURE  
SENSORS  
RELAY PCA  
AC  
Relay  
Photometer  
UV Lamp P/S  
PS 2  
(+12 VDC)  
Solenoid  
Drivers  
O3 Generator UV  
Lamp Xfromer  
O3 Generator UV  
Lamp P/S  
Cooling  
Fan  
DRY AIR  
Pump  
Photometer  
Photometer  
M/R valve  
Pump  
Controlled  
via I2C  
O3 Generator  
UV Lamp  
Figure 9-7:  
M703E Power Distribution Block diagram  
05744 Rev B  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
9.2.6. AC POWER CONFIGURATION  
The E-Series digital electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes. As long as  
instrument is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30  
seconds show a front panel display. Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and  
CPU should turn on as soon as the power is supplied.  
On the other hand, some of the calibrator’s the dry air pump must be properly configured for the type of power  
being supplied to the instrument. Figure 2-3 shows the location of the Pump AC Configuration jumper.  
JP7  
Pump  
Configuration  
Figure 9-8:  
Location of the AC Configuration Jumper for the Dry Air Pump  
9.2.6.1. AC configuration – Internal Pump (JP7)  
AC power configuration for the internal dry air pump is set using Jumper set JP7.  
Table 9-2: AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7)  
JUMPER  
BETWEEN  
PINS  
LINE  
POWER  
LINE  
FREQUENCY  
JUMPER  
COLOR  
FUNCTION  
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line  
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line  
Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral  
2 to 7  
3 to 8  
4 to 9  
60 HZ  
WHITE  
BLACK  
110VAC  
115 VAC  
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line  
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line  
Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral  
2 to 7  
3 to 8  
4 to 9  
50 HZ1  
Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together  
Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line  
Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together  
1 to 6  
3 to 8  
1 to 6  
3 to 8  
60 HZ  
BROWN  
BLUE  
220VAC  
240 VAC  
50 HZ1  
Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line  
1 A jumper between pins 5 and 10 may be present on the jumper plug assembly, but is only functional on the M300E and  
has no function on the Models M700E or M703E.  
146  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
110 VAC /115 VAC  
220 VAC /240 VAC  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6
7
8
8
9
9
10  
10  
Present on 50 Hz version of jumper set,  
and only functional for M300E  
Figure 9-9:  
Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7)  
9.3. FRONT PANEL INTERFACE  
LOCKING SCREW  
FASTENER  
FASTENER  
MESSAGE FIELD  
MODE FIELD  
KEYBOARD  
KEY DEFINITION FIELD  
ON / OFF SWITCH  
STATUS LED’s  
Figure 9-10:  
M703E Front Panel Layout  
The most commonly used method for communicating with the M703E Photometric Calibrator is via the  
instrument’s front panel, which includes a set of three status LEDs, a vacuum florescent display and a keyboard  
with 8 context sensitive keys.  
05744 Rev B  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
9.3.1.1. Calibrator Status LEDs  
Three LEDS are used to inform the user of the instruments basic operating status  
Table 9-3: Front Panel Status LEDs  
Name  
Color  
Behavior  
Significance  
Displays Warning  
messages and Test  
Function values  
At initial start up the various warning messages will appear  
here.  
Main Message  
Field  
N/A  
Displays  
“STANDBY”  
Mode Field  
N/A  
Instrument is in STANDBY mode.  
STATUS LEDs  
Unit is operating in STANDBY mode.  
Active  
Green  
OFF  
This LED glows green when the instrument is actively  
producing calibration gas.  
This LED only glows when the calibrator is performing an automatic  
calibration sequence.  
Auto  
Fault  
Yellow  
Red  
OFF  
The calibrator is warming up and therefore many of its subsystems  
are not yet operating within their optimum ranges. Various warning  
messages will appear.  
BLINKING  
9.3.1.2. Keyboard  
A row of eight keys just below the vacuum florescent display (see Figure 9-10) is the main method by which the  
user interacts with the calibrator. As the software is operated, labels appear on the bottom row of the display  
directly above each active key, defining the function of that key as it is relevant for the operation being  
performed. Pressing a key causes the associated instruction to be performed by the calibrator.  
Note that the keys do not auto-repeat. In circumstances where the same key must be activated for two  
consecutive operations, it must be released and re-pressed.  
9.3.1.3. Display  
The main display of the calibrator is a vacuum florescent display with two lines of 40 text characters each.  
Information is organized in the following manner (see Figure 9-10):  
MODE FIELD: Displays the name of the calibrator’s current operating mode.  
MESSAGE FIELD: Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operation  
data and response messages during interactive tasks.  
KEY DEFINITION FIELD: Displays the definitions for the row of keys just below the display. These  
definitions dynamic, context sensitive and software driven.  
148  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
9.3.1.4. Keyboard/Display Interface Electronics  
I2C to Relay Board  
Key Press  
Detect  
Display Data  
Decoder  
Display  
Controller  
Display Power  
Watchdog  
Keypad  
Decoder  
I2C Interface  
Serial  
Data  
From 5 VDC  
Power Supply  
Optional  
Maintenance  
LED  
Sample LED  
(Green)  
Maint.  
Switch  
2nd Lang.  
Switch  
Cal LED  
(Yellow)  
2 x 40 CHAR. VACUUM  
FLUORESCENT DISPLAY  
Fault LED  
(Red)  
KEYBOARD  
FRONT PANEL  
Beeper  
Figure 9-11:  
Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram  
The keyboard/display interface electronics of the M703E Calibrator watches the status of the eight front panel  
keys, alerts the CPU when keys are depressed, translates data from parallel to serial and back and manages  
communications between the keyboard, the CPU and the front panel display. Except for the Keyboard interrupt  
status bit, all communication between the CPU and the keyboard/display is handled by way of the instrument’s  
I2C buss. The CPU controls the clock signal and determines when the various devices on the bus are allowed to  
talk or required to listen. Data packets are labeled with addresses that identify for which device the information  
is intended.  
KEYPAD DECODER  
Each key on the front panel communicates with a decoder IC via a separate analog line. When a key is  
depressed the decoder chip notices the change of state of the associated signal; latches and holds the state of  
all eight lines (in effect creating an 8-bit data word); alerts the key-depress-detect circuit (a flip-flop IC);  
translates the 8-bit word into serial data and; sends this to the I2C interface chip.  
KEY-PRESS DETECT CIRCUIT  
This circuit flips the state of one of the inputs to the I2C interface chip causing it to send an interrupt signal to the  
CPU  
I2C INTERFACE CHIP  
This IC performs several functions:  
Using a dedicated digital status bit, it sends an interrupt signal alerting the CPU that new data from the  
keyboard is ready to send.  
Upon acknowledgement by the CPU that it has received the new keyboard data, the I2C interface chip  
resets the key-depress-detect flip-flop.  
In response to commands from the CPU, it turns the front panel status LEDs on and off and activates the  
beeper.  
Informs the CPU when the optional maintenance and second language switches have been opened or  
closed (see Chapter 5 for information on these options).  
05744 Rev B  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
DISPLAY DATA DECODER  
This decoder translates the serial data sent by the CPU (in TTY format) into a bitmapped image that is sent over  
a parallel data bus to the display.  
DISPLAY CONTROLLER  
This circuit manages the interactions between the display data decoder and the display itself. It generates a  
clock pulse that keeps the two devices synchronized. It can also, in response to commands from the CPU turn  
off and/or reset the display.  
DISPLAY POWER WATCHDOG  
The M703E calibrator’s display can begin to show garbled information or lock-up if the DC voltage supplied to it  
falls too low, even momentarily. To alleviate this, a brownout watchdog circuit monitors the level of the power  
supply and in the event that the voltage level falls below a certain level resets the display by turning it off, then  
back on.  
9.4. SOFTWARE OPERATION  
The M703E calibrator’s core module is a high performance, 386-based microcomputer running a version of  
DOS. On top of the DOS shell, special software developed by Teledyne Instruments interprets user commands  
from various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks, stores data in the CPU’s memory devices and  
calculates the concentrations in the sample gas. Figure 9-11 shows a block diagram of this software  
functionality.  
DOS Shell  
API FIRMWARE  
Calibrator Operations  
Memory Handling  
Calibration Procedures  
PC/104 BUS  
Configuration Procedures  
Calibration Data  
System Status Data  
Autonomic Systems  
Diagnostic Routines  
CALIBRATOR  
HARDWARE  
Interface Handling  
Sensor input Data  
Display Messages  
Keypad  
Measurement  
Algorithms for  
photometer  
Analog Output Data  
RS232 & RS485  
External Digital I/O  
PC/104 BUS  
Figure 9-12:  
Schematic of Basic Software Operation  
150  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
9.5. O3 GENERATOR OPERATION  
9.5.1. PRINCIPLE OF PHOTOLYTIC O3 GENERATION  
Ozone is a naturally occurring substance that is sometimes called "activated oxygen". It contains three atoms of  
oxygen (O3) instead of the usual two found in normal oxygen (O2) that is essential for life. Because of its  
relatively short half-life, ozone cannot be bottled and stored for later use and there fore must always be  
generated on-site by an ozone generator. The two main principles of ozone generation are UV-light and corona  
discharge. While the corona-discharge method is most common because of its ability to generate very high  
concentrations (up to 50%), it is inappropriate for calibration needs since the level of fine control over the O3  
concentration is poor. Also, the corona discharge method produces a small amount of NO2 as a byproduct,  
which also may be undesirable in a calibration application  
The UV-light method is most feasible in calibration application where production of low, accurate concentrations  
of ozone desired. This method mimics the radiation method that occurs naturally from the sun in the upper  
atmosphere producing the ozone layer. An ultra-violet lamp inside the generator emits a precise wavelength of  
UV Light (185 nm). Ambient air] is passed over an ultraviolet lamp, which splits some of the molecular oxygen  
(O2) in the gas into individual oxygen atoms which attach to other existing oxygen molecules (O2), forming ozone  
(O3).  
Figure 9-13:  
O3 Generator Internal Pneumatics  
05744 Rev B  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
9.5.2. GENERATOR PNEUMATIC OPERATION  
The rate of flow through the O3 generator is controlled by a flow control assembly located on the Regulator Sub-  
Assembly in the front of the M703E.  
O3 Generator  
Gas Inlet  
O3 Generator  
Heater Control PCA  
O3 Outlet to  
Photometer  
and  
O3 Outlet  
Internal Vent  
Measure / Reference  
Valve for  
Photometer Bench  
Figure 9-14:  
O3 Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations  
9.5.3. O3 GENERATOR ELECTRONIC OPERATION  
Electronically the O3 generator and its subcomponents act as peripheral devices operated by the CPU via the  
motherboard. Sensor signals, such as the UV lamp thermistor are routed to the motherboard, where they are  
digitized. Digital data is sent by the motherboard to the calibrator’s CPU and where required stored in either  
flash memory or on the CPU’s disk-on-chip. Commands from the CPU are sent to the motherboard and  
forwarded to the various devices via the calibrator’s I2C bus.  
152  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
Figure 9-15:  
O3 Generator Electronic Block Diagram  
UV Lamp  
O3 Generator  
Heater Control  
PCA  
UV Lamp Power  
Supply  
(200 VAC @ 30 kHz)  
UV Lamp Power  
Supply  
Transformer  
Reference Detector  
Preamp Power  
Connector  
Reference  
Detector  
Signal Output  
to Motherboard  
UV Lamp  
Power Connector  
UV Lamp  
I2C Connector  
O3 Generator  
Reference Detector  
O3 Generator  
Reference Detector  
PCA  
Figure 9-16:  
O3 Generator Electronic Components Location  
05744 Rev B  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
9.5.3.1. O3 Generator Temperature Control  
In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the M703E’s O3 generator is maintained at a constant  
48ºC. if the lamp temperature falls below 43ºC or rises above 53ºC a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU.  
This temperature is controlled as described in the section on the relay PCA (see Section 9.2.3.2). The location  
of the thermistor and heater associated with the O3 generator is shown below:  
UV Lamp  
O3 Generator  
Heater Control PCA  
(Heater is located beneath  
the PCA)  
UV Lamp  
Thermistor  
Figure 9-17:  
O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations  
154  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
9.6. PHOTOMETER OPERATION  
The Model M703E calibrator’s optional photometer determines the concentration of Ozone (O3) in a sample gas  
drawn through it. Sample and calibration gasses must be supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to  
establish a stable gas flow through the absorption tube where the gas’ ability to absorb ultraviolet (UV) radiation  
of a certain wavelength (in this case 254 nm) is measured.  
Gas bearing O3 and zero air are alternately routed through the photometer’s absorption tube. Measurements of  
the UV light passing through the sample gas with and without O3 present are made and recorded.  
Calibration of the photometer is performed in software and does not require physical adjustments. Two internal  
variables, a slope and offset are used to adjust the calibration of the photometer.  
The CPU uses these calibration values, the UV absorption measurements made on the sample gas in the  
absorption tube along with data regarding the current temperature and pressure of the gas to calculate a final O3  
concentration.  
9.6.1. MEASUREMENT METHOD  
9.6.1.1. Calculating O3 Concentration  
The basic principle by which photometer works is called Beer’s Law (also referred to as the Beer-Lambert  
equation). It defines the how light of a specific wavelength is absorbed by a particular gas molecule over a  
certain distance at a given temperature and pressure. The mathematical relationship between these three  
parameters for gasses at Standard Temperature and Pressure (STP) is:  
Equation 9-5  
I = I0 e-αLC  
at STP  
Where:  
Io  
I
is the intensity of the light if there was no absorption.  
is the intensity with absorption.  
L
C
Α
is the absorption path, or the distance the light travels as it is being absorbed.  
is the concentration of the absorbing gas. In the case of the Model 703E, Ozone (O3).  
is the absorption coefficient that tells how well O3 absorbs light at the specific wavelength of interest.  
To solve this equation for C, the concentration of the absorbing Gas (in this case O3), the application of a little  
algebra is required to rearrange the equation as follows:  
Equation 9-6  
Io  
I
1
C = ln  
×
at STP  
α L  
Unfortunately, both ambient temperature and pressure influence the density of the sample gas and therefore the  
number of ozone molecules present in the absorption tube thus changing the amount of light absorbed.  
05744 Rev B  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
In order to account for this effect the following addition is made to the equation:  
Equation 9-7  
Io  
I
1
Τ
29.92inHg  
C = ln  
×
×
×
273oΚ  
α L  
Ρ
Where:  
T
P
= sample ambient temperature in degrees Kelvin  
= ambient pressure in inches of mercury  
Finally, to convert the result into Parts per Billion (PPB), the following change is made:  
Equation 9-8  
9
Io  
I
10  
Τ
29.92inHg  
C = ln  
×
×
×
273o Κ  
α L  
Ρ
In a nutshell the M703E photometer:  
Measures each of the above variables: ambient temperature; ambient gas pressure; the intensity of the  
UV light beam with and without O3 present;  
Inserts know values for the length of the absorption path and the absorption coefficient, and:  
Calculates the concentration of O3 present in the sample gas.  
9.6.1.2. The Measurement / Reference Cycle  
In order to solve the Beer-Lambert equation it is necessary to know the intensity of the light passing through the  
absorption path both when O3 is present and when it is not. A valve called the measure/reference valve,  
physically located on front-left corner of the O3 generator assembly (see Figures 3-4 and 9-14) alternates the  
gas stream flowing to the photometer between zero air (diluent gas) and the O3 output from the O3 generator.  
This cycle takes about 6 seconds.  
Table 9-4: M703E Photometer Measurement / Reference Cycle  
TIME INDEX  
0 sec.  
STATUS  
Measure/Reference Valve Opens to the Measure Path.  
0 – 2 sec.  
Wait Period. Ensures that the Absorption tube has been adequately flushed of any  
previously present gasses.  
2 – 3 Seconds  
Analyzer measures the average UV light intensity of O3 bearing Sample Gas (I) during  
this period.  
3 sec.  
Measure/Reference Valve Opens to the Reference Path.  
3 – 5 sec.  
Wait Period. Ensures that the Absorption tube has been adequately flushed of O3  
bearing gas.  
5 – 6 Seconds  
Analyzer measures the average UV light intensity of Non-O3 bearing Sample Gas (I0)  
during this period.  
CYCLE REPEAT EVERY 6 SECONDS  
156  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Chassis  
PHOTOMETER BENCH  
yel  
blk  
DRY AIR  
IN  
O3 GAS INPUT  
PRESSURE SENSOR  
Filter  
PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE SENSOR  
On Back Panel  
Pressure  
Regulator  
blu  
pur  
PHOTOMETER  
INLET  
O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA  
pur  
grn  
REF/MEAS  
Valve  
Flow Control  
(800 cm3/min)  
blk  
yel  
grn  
PHOTOMETER  
ZERO IN  
orn  
red  
EXHAUST  
PUMP  
red  
PHOTOMETER  
ZERO OUT  
INTERNAL  
VENT  
PUMP  
orn  
PHOTOMETER  
OUTLET  
orn  
orn  
TO ANALYZER  
blu  
ZERO AIR  
IN  
TO ANALYZER  
VENT  
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD  
Figure 9-18:  
O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Measure Cycle  
M703E Chassis  
PHOTOMETER BENCH  
yel  
blk  
O3 GAS INPUT  
PRESSURE SENSOR  
DRY AIR  
IN  
On Back Panel  
Filter  
PHOTOMETER  
PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE SENSOR  
Pressure  
Regulator  
INLET  
pur  
blu  
O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA  
REF/MEAS pur  
Valve  
yel  
blk  
Flow Control  
(800 cm3/min)  
grn  
grn  
PHOTOMETER  
ZERO IN  
orn  
EXHAUST  
PUMP  
red  
PHOTOMETER  
ZERO OUT  
INTERNAL  
VENT  
PUMP  
orn  
PHOTOMETER  
OUTLET  
orn  
orn  
TO ANALYZER  
blu  
ZERO AIR  
IN  
TO ANALYZER  
VENT  
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD  
Figure 9-19:  
O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Reference Cycle  
05744 Rev B  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
9.6.1.3. The Absorption Path  
In the most basic terms, the M703E photometer uses a high energy, mercury vapor lamp to generate a beam of  
UV light. This beam passes through a window of material specifically chosen to be both non-reactive to O3 and  
transparent to UV radiation at 254nm and into an absorption tube filled with sample gas.  
Because ozone is a very efficient absorber of UV radiation the absorption path length required to create a  
measurable decrease in UV intensity is short enough (approximately 42 cm) that the light beam is only required  
to make one pass through the Absorption Tube. Therefore, no complex mirror system is needed to lengthen the  
effective path by bouncing the beam back and forth.  
Finally, the UV passes through a similar window at the other end of the absorption tube and is detected by a  
specially designed vacuum diode that only detects radiation at or very near a wavelength of 254nm. The  
specificity of the detector is high enough that no extra optical filtering of the UV light is needed.  
The detector reacts to the UV light and outputs a current signal that varies in direct relationship with the intensity  
of the light shining on it. This current signal is amplified and converted to a 0 to 5 VDC voltage analog signal  
voltage sent to the instrument’s motherboard where it is digitized. The CPU to be uses this digital data in  
computing the concentration of O3 in the absorption tube.  
Window  
Window  
UV Detector  
ABSORPTION TUBE  
Analog current  
signal is output by  
Detector  
Sample Gas IN  
Sample Gas OUT  
UV  
Source  
Absorption Path Length = 42 cm  
O-5 VDC  
analog signal  
Photometer  
Pre amp  
PCA  
to  
Motherboard  
Figure 9-20:  
O3 Photometer Absorption Path  
9.6.1.4. Interferent Rejection  
It should be noted that the UV absorption method for detecting ozone is subject to interference from a number of  
sources. The has M703E’s photometer been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from sulfur  
dioxide, nitrogen dioxide, nitric oxide, water, and meta-xylene.  
While the photometer rejects interference from the aromatic hydrocarbon meta-xylene, it should be noted that  
there are a very large number of other volatile aromatic hydrocarbons that could potentially interfere with ozone  
detection. If the M703E calibrator is installed in an environment where high aromatic hydrocarbon  
concentrations are suspected, specific tests should be conducted to reveal the amount of interference these  
compounds may be causing.  
158  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
9.6.2. PHOTOMETER LAYOUT  
The Photometer is where the absorption of UV light by ozone is measured and converted into a voltage. It  
consists of several sub-assemblies:  
A mercury-vapor UV lamp. This lamp is coated in a material that optically screens the UV radiation  
output to remove the O3 producing 185nm radiation. Only light at 254nm is emitted.  
An AC power supply that supplies the current for starting and maintaining the plasma arc of the mercury  
vapor lamp.  
A thermistor and DC heater attached to the UV Lamp to maintain the Lamp at an optimum operating  
temperature.  
42 cm long quartz absorption tube.  
A thermistor attached to the quartz tube for measuring sample gas temperature.  
Gas inlet and outlet mounting blocks that rout sample gas into and out of the photometer.  
The vacuum diode, UV detector that converts UV light to a DC current.  
A preamplifier assembly, which convert the Detector’s current output into a DC Voltage then amplifies it  
to a level readable by the A to D converter circuitry of the instrument’s motherboard  
Sample Gas  
Thermistor  
UV Lamp Thermistor  
(UV Lamp Heater Behind Thermistor)  
UV Lamp Power  
Transformer  
Absorption Tube  
UV Detector  
Power Connector  
from  
+15 VDC power supply  
Sample Gas  
Outlet  
UV Detector  
Preamp PCA  
Sample Gas Inlet  
UV Lamp Power  
UV Lamp Heater  
Control PCA  
Supply  
(200 VAC @ 30 kHz)  
UV Lamp  
Figure 9-21:  
O3 Photometer Layout – Top Cover Removed  
9.6.3. PHOTOMETER PNEUMATIC OPERATION  
The flow of gas through the photometer is created by a small internal pump that pulls air though the instrument.  
There are several advantages to this “pull through” configuration. Placing the pump down stream from the  
absorption tube avoids problems caused by the pumping process heating and compressing the sample.  
In order to measure accurately the presences of low concentrations of O3 in the sample air it is necessary to  
establish and maintain a relatively constant and stable volumetric flow of sample gas through the photometer.  
The simplest way to accomplish this is by placing a flow control assembly containing a critical flow orifice directly  
upstream of the pump but down stream from the absorption tube.  
The critical flow orifice installed in the pump supply line is tuned to create a gas flow of 800 cm3/min. A pressure  
sensor and a flow sensor, located on the O3 generator / photometer pressure flow sensor PCA, monitor the  
pressure and flow rate of the gas passing through the photometers absorption tube.  
See Figures 9-18 and 9-19 for depictions of the gas flow related to the photometer.  
05744 Rev B  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
9.6.4. PHOTOMETER ELECTRONIC OPERATION  
PC 104  
CPU Card  
MOTHER BOARD  
A/D  
Converter  
s
4 Bu  
PC 10  
Disk on  
Chip  
Flash  
Chip  
I2C Bus  
Photometer  
Sample Gas  
Pressure  
Sensor  
Thermistor Interface  
RELAY PCA  
Photometer M/R  
Valve  
(Located on 0#  
Generator Assembly)  
I2C  
Status  
LED  
y
Photometer  
Detector  
Preamp  
Photometer  
UV Lamp  
Temperature  
Photometer  
Sample Gas  
Temperature  
Absorption tube  
Photometer  
Lamp Power  
Supply  
Photometer  
Pump  
Photometer  
Detector  
Photometer  
Lamp Heater  
Photometer  
Figure 9-22:  
O3 Photometer Electronic Block Diagram  
Like the O3 generator, the O3 photometer and its subcomponents act as peripheral devices operated by the CPU  
via the motherboard. Communications to and from the CPU are handled by the motherboard.  
Outgoing commands for the various devices such as the photometer pump, the UV lamp power supply the U\V  
Lamp heater are issued via the I2C bus to circuitry on the relay PCA which turns them ON/OFF. The CPU also  
issues commands over the I2C bus that cause the relay PCA to cycle the measure/reference valve back and  
forth.  
Incoming date the UV light detector is amplified locally then converted to digital information by the motherboard.  
Output from the photometers temperature sensors is also amplified and converted to digital data by the  
motherboard. The O3 concentration of the sample gas is computed by the CPU using this data (along with gas  
pressure and flow data received from the M703E’s pressure sensors.  
9.6.4.1. O3 Photometer Temperature Control  
In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the M703E’s O3 photometer is maintained at a constant  
58ºC. This is intentionally set at a temperature higher than the ambient temperature of the M703E’s operating  
environment to make sure that local changes in temperature do not affect the UV Lamp. If the lamp temperature  
falls below 56ºC or rises above 61ºC a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU.  
This temperature is controlled as described in the section on the relay PCA (Section 9.3.3.2).  
The following TEST functions report these temperatures and are viewable from the instrument’s front panel:  
PHOTO LAMP TEMP - The temperature of the UV Lamp reported in ºC.  
PHOTO STEMP - The temperature of the Sample gas in the absorption tube reported in ºC.  
160  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Theory of Operation  
9.6.4.2. Pneumatic Sensors for the O3 Photometer  
The several sensors located on the pneumatic sensor just to the left rear of the O3 generator assembly measure  
the absolute pressure and the flow rate of gas inside the photometer’s absorption tube. This information is used  
by the CPU to calculate the O3 concentration of the sample gas (See Equation 9-7). Both of these  
measurements are made downstream from the absorption tube but upstream of the pump. A critical flow orifice  
located between the flow sensor and the pump maintains the gas flow through the photometer at 800 cm3/min.  
The following TEST functions are viewable from the instrument’s front panel:  
PHOTO FLOW - The flow rate of gas through the photometer measured in LPM.  
PHOTO SPRESS – the pressure of the gas inside the absorption tube. This pressure is reported in  
inches of mercury-absolute (in-Hg-A), i.e. referenced to a vacuum (zero absolute pressure). This is not  
the same as PSIG.  
USER NOTES:  
05744 Rev B  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
Theory of Operation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES:  
162  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
10. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES  
Predictive diagnostic functions including failure warnings and alarms built into the calibrator’s firmware allow the  
user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing painstaking preventative maintenance  
procedures.  
For the most part, the M703E calibrator is maintenance free, there are, however, a minimal number of simple  
procedures that when performed regularly will ensure that the M703E photometer continues to operate  
accurately and reliably over its the lifetime.  
Repairs and troubleshooting are covered in Section 11 of this manual.  
10.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE  
Table 10-1 below shows the recommended maintenance schedule for the M703E. Please note that in certain  
environments (i.e. dusty, very high ambient pollutant levels) some maintenance procedures may need to be  
performed more often than shown.  
NOTE  
A Span and Zero Calibration Check (see CAL CHECK REQ’D Column of Table 10-1) must be performed  
following certain of the maintenance procedure listed below.  
See Section 8.1 for instructions on performing a calibration check.  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE PERFORMING ANY OF  
THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS THAT REQUIRE ENTRY INTO THE INTERIOR OF THE  
ANALYZER.  
NOTE  
THE OPERATIONS OUTLINED IN THIS CHAPTER ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY  
QUALIFIED MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL ONLY.  
05744 Rev B  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator Operators Manual  
USER NOTES:  
164  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
10.2. PERFORMING LEAK CHECKS  
Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction; Section Error! Reference source not found.  
presents a simple leak check procedure. Section 10.2.1 describes a more thorough procedure.  
10.2.1. PRESSURE LEAK CHECK  
- BEGINNING OF INSERTION: Replace original section below with this section, per Mike Troy:  
Obtain a leak checker similar to the Teledyne Instruments’ part number 01960, which contains a small pump,  
shut-off valve and pressure gauge. Alternatively, a tank of pressurized gas, with the two-stage regulator  
adjusted to 15 psi, a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be used.  
CAUTION  
Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not apply a vacuum as this will  
cause soap solution to be drawn into the instrument, contaminating it.  
DO NOT EXCEED 15 PSI PRESSURE.  
1. Turn OFF power to the calibrator.  
2. Remove the instrument cover  
3. Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the “dry air in” port at the rear panel.  
4. Install caps on the following fittings on the rear panel.  
Exhaust  
Vent  
Internal Vent  
Zero  
Air Inlet  
Both CALGAS OUT fittings  
NOTE  
The M703E calibrator cannot be leak checked with the pump in line due to internal leakage that normally  
occurs in the pump.  
5. Locate the dry air pump.  
6. Disconnect the two fittings on the dry air pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump.  
7. Locate the photometer pump.  
8. Disconnect the two fittings on the photometer pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump.  
9. Pressurize the calibrator with the leak checker, allowing enough time to pressurize the instrument fully.  
10. Check each fitting with soap bubble solution, looking for bubbles.  
05744 Rev B  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution.  
Do not re-apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it.  
Do not exceed 15 psi pressure.  
11. Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate should be < 1 in-Hg (0.4 psi) in 5  
minutes after the pressure is shut off.  
M703E Chassis  
PHOTOMETER BENCH  
yel  
blk  
DRY AIR  
IN  
O3 GAS INPUT  
PRESSURE SENSOR  
Filter  
PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE SENSOR  
On Back Panel  
Pressure  
Regulator  
blu  
PHOTOMETER  
INLET  
O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA  
pur  
REF/MEAS  
Valve  
pur  
grn  
blk  
yel  
Flow Control  
(800 cm3/min)  
grn  
PHOTOMETER  
ZERO IN  
orn  
red  
EXHAUST  
PUMP  
red  
PHOTOMETER  
ZERO OUT  
INTERNAL  
VENT  
orn  
PHOTOMETER  
OUTLET  
orn  
orn  
TO ANALYZER  
TO ANALYZER  
VENT  
PUMP  
blu  
ZERO AIR  
IN  
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD  
Figure 10-1:  
Pneumatic setup for performing Pressure Leak Checks  
-END OF INSERTION  
168  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
If you cannot locate the leak by the above procedure, obtain a leak checker similar to the Teledyne Instruments’  
part number 01960, which contains a small pump, shut-off valve and pressure gauge. Alternatively, a tank of  
pressurized gas, with the two-stage regulator adjusted to 15 psi, a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be  
used.  
CAUTION  
Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not apply / re-apply vacuum as  
this will cause soap solution to be drawn into the instrument, contaminating it.  
DO NOT EXCEED 15 PSI PRESSURE.  
1. Turn OFF power to the instrument.  
2. Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel.  
3. Install caps on the following fittings on the rear panel.  
Exhaust  
Vent  
Internal Vent  
Zero  
Air Inlet  
Both CALGAS OUT fittings  
05744 Rev B  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
NOTE  
The M703E calibrator cannot be leak checked with the pump in line due to internal leakage that normally  
occurs in the pump.  
1. Remove the instrument cover  
2. Locate the photometer pump.  
3. Disconnect the two fittings on the photometer pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump.  
4. Locate the dry air pump.  
5. Disconnect the two fittings on the dry air pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump.  
6. Locate the photometer pump.  
7. Disconnect the two fittings on the photometer pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump.  
8. Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker, allowing enough time to pressurize the instrument fully.  
9. Check each fitting with soap bubble solution, looking for bubbles.  
Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution.  
Do not re-apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it.  
Do not exceed 15 psi pressure.  
10. Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate should be < 1 in-Hg (0.4 psi) in 5  
minutes after the pressure is shut off.  
M703E Chassis  
PHOTOMETER BENCH  
yel  
blk  
DRY AIR  
IN  
O3 GAS INPUT  
PRESSURE SENSOR  
Filter  
PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE SENSOR  
On Back Panel  
Pressure  
Regulator  
blu  
PHOTOMETER  
INLET  
O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER  
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA  
pur  
REF/MEAS  
Valve  
pur  
grn  
blk  
yel  
Flow Control  
(800 cm3/min)  
grn  
PHOTOMETER  
ZERO IN  
orn  
red  
EXHAUST  
PUMP  
red  
PHOTOMETER  
ZERO OUT  
INTERNAL  
VENT  
orn  
PHOTOMETER  
OUTLET  
orn  
orn  
TO ANALYZER  
TO ANALYZER  
VENT  
PUMP  
blu  
ZERO AIR  
IN  
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD  
Figure 10-2:  
Pneumatic setup for performing Pressure Leak Checks  
170  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
10.3. CLEANING OR REPLACING THE ABSORPTION TUBE  
NOTE:  
Although this procedure should never be needed as long as the user is careful only to supply the  
photometer with clean, dry and particulate free zero air, it is included here for those rare occasions  
when cleaning or replacing the absorption tube may be required.  
1. Remove the center cover from the optical bench.  
2. Unclip the sample thermistor from the tube.  
3. Loosen the two screws on the round tube retainers at either end of the tube.  
4. Using both hands, carefully rotate the tube to free it.  
5. Slide the tube towards the lamp housing.  
The front of the tube can now be slid past the detector block and out of the instrument.  
CAUTION  
DO NOT CAUSE THE TUBE TO BIND AGAINST THE METAL HOUSINGS.  
THE TUBE MAY BREAK AND CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY.  
6. Clean the tube with Distilled or de-ionized water by running a swab from end-to-end.  
7. Air-dry the tube.  
8. Check the cleaning job by looking down the bore of the tube.  
It should be free from dirt and lint.  
9. Inspect the o-rings that seal the ends of the optical tube (these o-rings may stay seated in the manifolds  
when the tube is removed.)  
If there is any noticeable damage to these o-rings, they should be replaced.  
10. Re-assemble the tube into the lamp housing and perform an AUTO LEAK CHECK on the instrument.  
NOTE:  
It is important for proper optical alignment that the tube be pushed all the way towards the front of the  
optical bench when it is re-assembled.  
This will ensure that the tube is assembled with the forward end against the stop inside the detector  
manifold.  
10.4. REBUILDING THE DRY AIR PUMP  
The diaphragm in the sample pump will periodically wear out and require replacement. A sample rebuild kit is  
available. See Appendix B of this manual for the part number of the pump rebuild kit. Instructions and diagrams  
are included with the kit.  
Always perform a Flow and Leak Check after rebuilding the Sample Pump.  
05744 Rev B  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
10.5. PHOTOMETER UV SOURCE LAMP ADJUSTMENT  
This procedure details the steps for adjustment of the UV source lamp in the optical bench assembly. This  
procedure should be done whenever the PHOTO REFERENCE test function value drops below 3000 mV.  
1. Make sure the analyzer is warmed-up and has been running for at least 15 minutes before proceeding.  
2. Remove the cover from the analyzer.  
3. Locate the optional Photometer (see Figure 3-3)  
4. Locate the UV DETECTOR GAIN ADJUST POT on the photometer assembly (see Figure 10-3).  
5. Perform the following procedure:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
Make sure that the M703E  
is in standby mode.  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
EXIT  
COMM VARS DIAG  
SETUP X.X  
ENTER PASSWORD  
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these keys to enter  
the correct PASSWORD  
DIAG  
SIGNAL I/O  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR EXIT  
DIAG I/O  
1) CONTROL_IN_2=OFF  
PREV NEXT JUMP  
PRNT EXIT  
DIAG I/O  
JUMP TO:1  
1
7
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these keys to show  
the ID number for the  
desired signal  
(see Appendix A)  
DIAG  
17) PHOTO_DET = 3342.2 MV  
PRNT EXIT  
PREV NEXT  
Additional adjustment can be made by physically  
rotating the lamp in it’s housing.  
To do this, slightly loosen the UV lamp  
setscrew.  
Using an insulated pot adjustment tool, Turn the UV  
DETECTOR GAIN ADJUSTMENT POT until the value of  
PHOTO_DET is as close as possible to 4600.0 MV.  
Next, slowly rotate the lamp up to ¼ turn in  
either direction while watching the  
PHOTO_DET signal.  
Once the optimum lamp position is  
determined, re-tighten the lamp  
setscrew  
If a minimum reading of 3500.0 mV can not be reached,  
the lamp must be replaced.  
6. Replace the cover on the analyzer.  
172  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
Figure 10-3: Photometer – Location of UV Detector Gain Adjustment & UV Lamp Set Screw  
10.6. PHOTOMETER UV SOURCE LAMP REPLACEMENT  
This procedure details the steps for replacement of the UV source lamp in the optical bench assembly. This  
procedure should be done whenever the lamp can no longer be adjusted as described in Section 10.2.3.  
1. Turn the analyzer off.  
2. Remove the cover from the analyzer.  
3. Locate the Optical Bench Assembly (see Figure 3-3)  
4. Locate the UV lamp at the rear of the optical bench assembly (see Figure 10-3)  
5. Unplug the lamp cable from the power supply connector on the side of the optical bench.  
6. Slightly loosen (do not remove) the UV lamp setscrew and pull the lamp from its housing.  
7. Install the new lamp in the housing, pushing it all the way in. Leave the UV lamp setscrew loose for  
now.  
8. Turn the analyzer back on and allow it to warm up for at least 15 minutes.  
9. Turn the UV detector gain adjustment pot (See Figure 10-3) clockwise to its minimum value. The pot  
should click softly when the limit is reached.  
10. Perform the UV Lamp Adjustment procedure described in Section 10.5, with the following exceptions:  
Slowly rotate the lamp in its housing (up to ¼ turn in either direction) until a MAXIMUM value (or 4600  
mVDC) is observed.  
Make sure the lamp is pushed all the way into the housing while performing this rotation.  
If the PHOTO_DET will not drop below 5000 mV while performing this rotation, contact T-API  
Customer Service for assistance.  
Once a lamp position is found that corresponds to a maximum observed value for PHOTO_DET, tighten  
the lamp setscrew at the approximate maximum value observed.  
If the value of PHOTO_DET is not within the range of 4400 – 4600 mV, adjust it accordingly.  
11. Replace the cover on the analyzer.  
NOTE  
The UV lamp contains mercury (Hg), which is considered hazardous waste. The lamp should be  
disposed of in accordance with local regulations regarding waste containing mercury.  
05744 Rev B  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
10.7. ADJUSTMENT OR REPLACEMENT OF OZONE  
GENERATOR UV LAMP  
This procedure details the steps for replacement and initial adjustment of the ozone generator lamp. If you are  
adjusting an existing lamp, skip to Step 8.  
1. Turn off the analyzer.  
2. Remove the cover from the analyzer.  
3. Locate the O3 generator (see Figure 3-3).  
UV Lamp  
Set Screws  
Lamp  
O-ring  
O3 Generator  
Body  
Figure 10-4:  
O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations  
4. Remove the two setscrews on the top of the O3 generator and gently pull out the old lamp.  
5. Inspect the o-ring beneath the nut and replace if damaged.  
6. Install the new lamp in O3 generator housing.  
Do not fully tighten the setscrews.  
The lamp should be able to be rotated in the assembly by grasping the lamp cable.  
7. Turn on analyzer and allow it to stabilize for at least 20 minutes.  
8. Locate the O3 generator reference detector adjustment potentiometer.  
O3 Generator  
Body  
Adjustment  
Pot  
O3  
Generator  
Reference  
Detector  
PCA  
Figure 10-5:  
Location of O3 Generator Reference Detector Adjustment Pot  
174  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
9. Perform the following procedure:  
10. Tighten the two set -screws.  
11. Replace the calibrator’s cover  
12. Perform an auto-leak check (See Section 10.2.1).  
13. Calibrate the Ozone Generator calibration (see Section 8.2 Calibrating the O3 Generator ??)  
05744 Rev B  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
USER NOTES:  
176  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR OF  
THE M703E CALIBRATOR  
This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance problems with the calibrator.  
NOTE  
The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified maintenance  
personnel only.  
CAUTION  
Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be carried out with the  
instrument open and running.  
Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical  
damage to the calibrator.  
Do not drop tools into the calibrator or leave those after your procedures.  
Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while  
operating inside the calibrator.  
Use common sense when operating inside a running calibrator.  
11.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING  
The M703E Photometric Calibrator has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and  
repaired. During operation, it continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key  
operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations.  
A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps:  
14. Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary.  
15. Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. Note any major  
deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.  
16. Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic communication channels are  
operating properly.  
Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the  
relay PCA.  
Note that the calibrator’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors match the color of the  
corresponding test points on the relay PCA.  
17. Suspect a leak first!  
Customer service data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually traced to leaks in the  
internal pneumatics of the calibrator or the diluent gas and source gases delivery systems.  
Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal/external gas lines, damaged seals,  
punctured gas lines, a damaged / malfunctioning pumps, etc.  
05744 Rev B  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
18. Follow the procedures defined in Section 3.4.4 to confirm that the calibrator’s vital functions are working  
(power supplies, CPU, relay PCA, keyboard, PMT cooler, etc.).  
See Figure 3-3 for general layout of components and sub-assemblies in the calibrator.  
See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D.  
11.1.1. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES  
The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message being displayed on the  
front panel. Table 11-1 lists warning messages, along with their meaning and recommended corrective action.  
It should be noted that more than two or three warning messages occurring at the same time is often an  
indication that some fundamental sub-system (power supply, relay PCA, motherboard) has failed rather than an  
indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings. In this case, it is recommended that proper  
operation of power supplies (See Section 11.4.3), the relay PCA (See Section 11.4.6), and the motherboard  
(See Section11.4.8) be confirmed before addressing the specific warning messages.  
The M703E will alert the user that a Warning Message is active by displaying the keypad label MSG on the Front  
Panel. In this case, the Front panel display will look something like the following:  
STANDBY  
TEST  
LAMP DRIVER WARNING  
STBY MSG CLR SETUP  
GEN  
The calibrator will also alert the user via the Serial I/O COM port(s) and cause the FAULT LED on the front panel  
to blink.  
To view or clear the various warning messages press:  
STANDBY  
TEST  
SYSTEM RESET  
Suppresses the  
warning messages  
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP  
STANDBY  
SYSTEM RESET  
MSG returns the active  
warnings to the message  
field.  
TEST  
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP  
STANDBY  
SYSTEM RESET  
Press CLR to clear the current  
TEST  
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP  
message.  
If more than one warning is  
active, the next message will take  
its place.  
SYSTEM  
TEST  
ANALOG CAL WARNING  
CLR SETUP  
Once the last warning has  
been cleared, the MESSAGE  
FIELD will return to displaying  
the currently selected TEST  
FUNCTION and value.  
NOTE:  
If a warning message persists after  
several attempts to clear it, the message  
may indicate a real problem and not an  
artifact of the warm-up period  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
178  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
Table 11-1: Front Panel Warning Messages  
WARNING  
FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES  
Configuration and  
Calibration data reset to  
original Factory state.  
- Failed Disk on Chip  
- User has erased configuration data  
CONFIG INITIALIZED  
- Failed Disk-on-Chip.  
- User cleared data.  
Data Storage in iDAS was  
erased.  
DATA INITIALIZED  
- WARNING only appears on Serial I/O COM Port(s)  
- Front Panel Display will be frozen, blank or will not  
The CPU is unable to  
Communicate with the  
Front Panel Display  
Keyboard  
respond.  
FRONT PANEL WARN  
- Failed Keyboard  
- I2C Bus failure  
- Loose Connector/Wiring  
- I2C has failed  
The CPU is unable to  
communicate with either  
the O3 generator or  
photometer lamp I2C driver  
chip.  
LAMP DRIVER WARN  
- No IZS option installed, instrument improperly configured  
- O3 generator heater  
- O3 generator temperature sensor  
- Relay controlling the O3 generator heater  
- Entire Relay PCA  
IZS Ozone Generator  
Temp is outside of control  
range of 48C 3C.  
O3 GEN LAMP TEMP  
WARNING  
- I2C Bus  
Possible failure of:  
- O3 generator UV Lamp  
The O3 generator’s  
reference detector output  
has dropped below 50 mV.1  
O3 GEN REFERENCE  
WARNING1  
- O3 generator reference detector  
- O3 generator lamp power supply  
- I2C bus  
The photometer pump  
failed to turn on within the  
specified timeout period  
(default = 30 sec.).  
- Failed Pump  
- Problem with Relay PCA  
- 12 VDC power supply problem  
O3 PUMP WARNING1  
Possible failure of:  
- Bench lamp heater  
- Bench lamp temperature sensor  
- Relay controlling the bench heater  
- Entire Relay PCA  
The photometer lamp temp  
PHOTO LAMP TEMP  
WARNING  
is < 51C or >61C.  
- I2C Bus  
- Hot” Lamp  
Value output during the  
Photometer’s reference  
cycle changes from  
measurements to  
measurement more than  
25% of the time.  
- Faulty UV source lamp  
- Noisy UV detector  
- Faulty UV lamp power supply  
- Faulty ± 15 VDC power supply  
PHOTO LAMP STABILITY  
WARNING  
Possible failure of:  
- UV Lamp  
- UV Photo-Detector Preamp  
Occurs when Ref is  
<2500 mVDC  
or >4950 mVDC.  
PHOTO REFERENCE  
WARNING  
Mother Board not detected  
on power up.  
- THIS WARNING only appears on Serial I/O COM Port(s)  
Front Panel Display will be frozen, blank or will not  
respond.  
REAR BOARD NOT DET  
- Failure of Mother Board  
(table continued)  
05744 Rev B  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
Table 11-1:  
Front Panel Warning Messages (cont.)  
WARNING  
FAULT CONDITION  
POSSIBLE CAUSES  
- I2C Bus failure  
The CPU cannot  
communicate with the  
Relay PCA.  
RELAY BOARD WARN  
- Failed relay PCA  
- Loose connectors/wiring  
The computer has  
rebooted.  
- This message occurs at power on.  
- If it is confirmed that power has not been interrupted:  
- Failed +5 VDC power  
SYSTEM RESET  
- Fatal error caused software to restart  
- Loose connector/wiring  
11.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS  
Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the test functions viewable from the calibrators front panel  
can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of  
the calibrators Theory of Operation (see Chapter 9).  
The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the “Nominal Range” column of the calibrator Final  
Test and Validation Data Sheet shipped with the instrument. Values outside these acceptable ranges indicate a  
failure of one or more of the calibrator’s subsystems. Functions whose values are still within the acceptable  
range but have significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet may also  
indicate a failure.  
A worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the value of these Test Functions.  
Table 11-2 contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range.  
Table 11-2: Test Functions - Indicated Failures  
TEST FUNCTION  
DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS.  
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN REFERENCE WARNING from Table  
11-1  
O3 GEN REF1  
Gas flow problems directly affect the concentration accuracy of the M703E’s O3 calibration  
gases. This number is computed using data from the calibrator’s  
OUTPUT FLOW  
O3 GEN DRIVE  
- Check for Gas Flow problems.  
- Check the pressure regulator  
Check the O3 generator heater and temperature sensors  
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11-1  
Incorrect Lamp temperature can affect the efficiency and durability of the O3 generators UV  
lamp.  
O3 LAMP TEMP  
REG PRESSURE  
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table  
11-1  
Same as REGULATOR PRESSURE WARNING from Table 11-1  
If the Box Temperature is out of range, make sure that the:  
Box Temperature typically runs ~7C warmer than ambient temperature.  
- The Exhaust-Fan is running  
BOX TEMP  
- The there is sufficient open space to the side and rear of instrument to allow adequate  
ventilation.  
(table continued)  
180  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
Table 11-2:  
Test Functions - Indicated Failures  
TEST FUNCTION  
DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS.  
If the value displayed is too high the UV Source has become brighter. Adjust the variable  
gain potentiometer on the UV Preamp Board in the optical bench.  
If the value displayed is too low:  
- < 100mV – Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply.  
- < 2000mV – Lamp output has dropped, adjust UV Preamp Board or replace lamp.  
PHOTO MEASURE  
&
If the value displayed is constantly changing:  
- Bad UV lamp.  
PHOTO REFERENCE  
- Defective UV lamp power supply.  
- Failed I2C Bus.  
If the PHOTO REFERENCE value changes by more than 10mV between zero and  
span gas:  
- Defective/leaking switching valve.  
Gas flow problems directly affect the accuracy of the photometer measurements and  
therefore the concentration accuracy of cal gas mixtures involving O3 and GPT mixtures.  
PHOTO FLOW  
- Check for Gas Flow problems.  
Poor photometer temp control can cause instrument noise, stability and drift. Temperatures  
outside of the specified range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern.  
PHOTO LAMP TEMP  
Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11-1  
The pressure of the gas in the photometer’s sample chamber is used to calculate the  
concentration of O3 in the gas stream. Incorrect sample pressure can cause inaccurate  
readings.  
PHOTO SPRESS  
- Check for Gas Flow problems. See Section Table 11-1.  
The temperature of the gas in the photometer’s sample chamber is used to calculate the  
concentration of O3 in the gas stream. Incorrect sample temperature can cause inaccurate  
readings.  
Possible causes of faults are:  
- Bad bench lamp heater  
PHOTO STEMP  
- Failed sample temperature sensor  
- Failed relay controlling the bench heater  
- Failed Relay PCA  
- I2C Bus malfunction  
- Hot Lamp  
Values outside range indicate:  
Contamination of the Zero Air or Span Gas supply.  
Instrument is miss-calibrated.  
Blocked Gas Flow.  
PHOTO SLOPE  
Faulty Sample Pressure Sensor or circuitry.  
Bad/incorrect Span Gas concentration.  
Values outside range indicate:  
Contamination of the Zero Air supply.  
Time of Day clock is too fast or slow.  
To adjust see Section 6.7.2.  
Battery in clock chip on CPU board may be dead.  
PHOTO OFFSET  
TIME  
05744 Rev B  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
11.1.3. USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O FUNCTION  
The Signal I/O parameters found under the DIAG Menu combined with a thorough understanding of the  
instruments Theory of Operation (found in Chapter 9) are useful for troubleshooting in three ways:  
The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the calibrator’s critical inputs and outputs.  
Many of the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control of the CPU can be  
manually exercised.  
The technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital Output signals.  
This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling these signals on the  
operation of the calibrator. Figure 11-1 is an example of how to use the Signal I/O menu to view the raw voltage  
of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal. The specific parameter will vary  
depending on the situation.  
Figure 11-1:  
Example of Signal I/O Function  
182  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11.2. USING THE ANALOG OUTPUT TEST CHANNEL  
The signals available for output over the M703E’s analog output channel can also be used as diagnostic tools.  
See Section 6.9 for instruction on activating the analog output and selecting a function.  
Table 11-3: Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic Tools  
TEST  
CHANNEL  
FULL  
SCALE  
CAUSES OF EXTREMELY  
HIGH / LOW READINGS  
DESCRIPTION  
ZERO  
NONE  
TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF  
If the value displayed is:  
-
>5000 mV: The UV source has become brighter. Adjust the  
UV Detector Gain potentiometer.  
The raw output of the  
photometer during its  
measure cycle  
-
-
< 100mV – Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply.  
O3 PHOTO  
MEAS  
0 mV  
5000 mV*  
< 2000mV – Lamp output has dropped, adjust UV Preamp  
Board or replace lamp.  
If the value displayed is constantly changing:  
-
-
-
Bad UV lamp.  
Defective UV lamp power supply.  
Failed I2C Bus.  
The raw output of the  
photometer during its  
reference cycle  
O3 PHOTO  
REF  
0 mV  
5000 mV  
If the PHOTO REFERENCE value changes by more than  
10mV between zero and span gas:  
-
Defective/leaking M/R switching valve.  
The raw output of the  
O3 generator’s  
reference detector  
O3 GEN  
REF  
Possible causes of faults are the same as OUTPUT FLOW from  
Table 11-2.  
0 mV  
5000 mV  
Output flow rate  
(computed from  
regulator pressure).  
OUTPUT  
FLOW  
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN REFERENCE  
WARNING from Table 11-1  
0 LPM  
6.000 LPM  
The pressure of gas in  
the photometer  
absorption tube  
SAMPLE  
PRESSURE  
0 "Hg  
0 cm3/min  
0 C  
40 "Hg-In-A  
1000 cc/m  
70 C  
Check for Gas Flow problems.  
Check for Gas Flow problems.  
SAMPLE  
FLOW  
The gas flow rate  
through the photometer  
The temperature of gas  
in the photometer  
absorption tube  
SAMPLE  
TEMP  
Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO STEMP from  
Table 11-2  
Possible failure of:  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Bench lamp heater  
Bench lamp temperature sensor  
Relay controlling the bench heater  
Entire Relay PCA  
PHOTO  
LAMP  
TEMP  
The temperature of the  
photometer UV lamp  
0 C  
70 C  
I2C Bus  
Hot” Lamp  
The temperature of the  
O3 generator’s UV  
lamp  
O3 LAMP  
TEMP  
0 mV  
5000 mV  
Same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11-1  
The temperature inside  
the M703E’s chassis  
(same as BOX TEMP)  
CHASSIS  
TEMP  
Possible causes of faults are the same as BOX TEMP from Table  
11-2  
0 C  
70 C  
-
-
-
-
I2C Bus malfunction  
Gas flow problem through the photometer.  
Electronic failure of the photometer subsystems  
The current  
Failure or pressure / temperature sensors associated with the  
photometer  
O3 PHOTO  
CONC  
concentration of O3  
being measured by the  
photometer.  
- - -  
-
-
-
-
Bad/incorrect Span Gas concentration  
Contamination of the Zero Air supply.  
Malfunction of the O3 generator.  
Internal A/D converter problem  
05744 Rev B  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
11.3. USING THE INTERNAL ELECTRONIC STATUS LEDS  
Several LEDs are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the calibrators CPU, I2C bus and Relay  
PCA are functioning properly.  
11.3.1. CPU STATUS INDICATOR  
DS5, a red LED, that is located on upper portion of the motherboard, just to the right of the CPU board, flashes  
when the CPU is running the main program loop. After power-up, approximately 30 – 60 seconds, DS5 should  
flash on and off. If characters are written to the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files  
have become corrupted, contact customer service because it may be possible to recover operation of the  
calibrator. If after 30 – 60 seconds neither DS5 is flashing and no characters have been written to the front  
panel display then the CPU is bad and must be replaced.  
Mother Board  
P/N 04069  
CPU Status LED  
Figure 11-2:  
CPU Status Indicator  
11.3.2. RELAY PCA STATUS LEDS  
There are seven LEDs located on the Relay PCA. Some are not used on this model.  
11.3.2.1. I2C Bus Watchdog Status LEDs  
The most important is D1 (see, which indicates the health of the I2C bus.  
Table 11-4: Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications  
LED  
Function  
I2C bus Health  
Fault Status  
Indicated Failure(s)  
D1  
Continuously ON  
Failed/Halted CPU  
(Red)  
(Watchdog Circuit) or  
Continuously OFF  
Faulty Mother Board, Keyboard or Relay PCA  
Faulty Connectors/Wiring between Mother Board,  
Keyboard or Relay PCA  
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)  
If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG Menu Signal I/O to identify hardware  
failures of the relays and switches on the Relay.  
184  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11.3.2.2. O3 Status LEDs  
D9 (Green) – External Zero Air Valve Status  
D7 (Green) Photometer Meas/Ref Valve Status  
D2 (Yellow) Dry (zero) Air Pump Status  
D15 (Yellow) - Photometer Lamp Heater  
D16 (Yellow) – O3 Generator Lamp Heater  
D1 (RED)  
Watchdog  
Indicator  
Figure 11-3:  
Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting  
Table 11-5: Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications  
SIGNAL I/O PARAMETER  
LED  
FUNCTION  
DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE  
Pump should start /stop  
ACTIVATED BY  
VIEW RESULT  
Failed pump  
Failed AC Relay on Relay PCA  
Failed Relay PCA  
Faulty AC Power Supply (PS2)  
Faulty Connectors/Wiring  
Valve should audibly change states.  
If not:  
Failed Valve  
Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay PCA  
Failed Relay PCA  
Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)  
Faulty Connectors/Wiring  
Pump should start /stop  
Failed pump  
Failed Drive IC on Relay PCA  
Failed Relay PCA  
Status of AC  
powered Dry  
Air Pump  
D2  
Yellow  
ZERO_AIR_PUMP  
PHOTO_REF_VALVE  
O3-PUMP-ON  
N/A  
Photometer  
Meas/Ref  
Valve  
D7  
Green  
N/A  
N/A  
Status of DC  
powered  
Photometer  
Pump  
D9  
Green  
Faulty AC Power Supply (PS2)  
Faulty Connectors/Wiring  
Voltage displayed should change.  
If not:  
D15  
Yellow  
Photometer  
Heater Status  
PHOTO_LAMP_HEATER PHOTO_LAMP_TEMP  
Failed Heater  
Faulty Temperature Sensor  
Failed AC Relay  
Faulty Connectors/Wiring  
D16  
Green  
O3 Generator  
Heater Status  
O3_GEN_HEATER  
O3_GEN_TEMP  
05744 Rev B  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
11.4. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT  
The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures  
or performance problems within the M703E calibrator. In most cases, this includes a list of possible components  
or subsystems that might be the source of the problem. This section describes how to check individual  
components or subsystems to determine if which is actually the cause of the problem being investigated.  
11.4.1. VERIFY SUBSYSTEM CALIBRATION  
A good first step when troubleshooting the operation of the M703E calibrator is to verify that its major  
subsystems are properly calibrated. These are:  
Test Channel D A conversion (see Section 6.9.2).  
Gas pressure calibration (see Section 8.3).  
When optional O3 components are installed, you should also check:  
Photometer calibration (see Section 8.1).  
O3 generator calibration (see Section 8.2).  
11.4.2. AC MAIN POWER  
The M703E calibrator’s electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes. As long as  
system is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30  
seconds show a front panel display.  
Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and CPU should turn on as soon as  
the power is supplied.  
If they do not, check the circuit breaker built into the ON/OFF switch on the instruments front panel  
CAUTION  
SHOULD THE AC POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP, INVESTIGATE AND CORRECT  
THE CONDITION CAUSING THIS SITUATION BEFORE TURNING THE  
CALIBRATOR BACK ON.  
186  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11.4.3. DC POWER SUPPLY  
If you have determined that the calibrator’s AC mains power is working, but the unit is still not operating properly,  
there may be a problem with one of the instrument’s switching power supplies. The supplies can have two  
faults, namely no DC output, and noisy output.  
To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems, the wiring used to connect the various printed circuit assemblies  
and DC Powered components and the associated test points on the relay PCA follow a standard color-coding  
scheme as defined in the following table.  
TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7  
DGND +5V AGND +15V -15V +12R 12V  
Figure 11-4:  
Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA  
Table 11-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes  
NAME  
Dgnd  
+5V  
TEST POINT#  
TP AND WIRE COLOR  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Black  
Red  
Agnd  
+15V  
-15V  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Purple  
Orange  
+12R  
+12V  
05744 Rev B  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in the table below, and an  
oscilloscope, in AC mode, with band limiting turned on, can be used to evaluate if the supplies are producing  
excessive noise (> 100 mV p-p).  
Table 11-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels  
CHECK RELAY PCA TEST POINTS  
POWER  
VOLTAGE  
SUPPLY  
ASSY  
MIN V  
MAX V  
FROM TEST POINT  
TO TEST POINT  
NAME  
Dgnd  
#
1
3
3
3
1
6
6
NAME  
+5  
#
2
PS1  
PS1  
PS1  
PS1  
PS1  
PS2  
PS2  
+5  
+15  
4.8  
5.25  
16V  
Agnd  
+15  
4
13.5  
-15  
Agnd  
-15V  
5
-14V  
-0.05  
-0.05  
11.75  
-0.05  
-16V  
0.05  
0.05  
12.5  
0.05  
Agnd  
Chassis  
+12  
Agnd  
Dgnd  
Chassis  
+12V  
Dgnd  
1
Dgnd  
N/A  
7
+12V Ret  
+12V Ret  
+12 V ret  
1
11.4.4. I2C BUS  
Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay PCA & D2 on the valve  
driver PCA in conjunction with the performance of the front panel display.  
Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly the I2C bus is operating properly if:  
If D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve Driver PCA are flashing, or  
Pressing a key on the front panel results in a change to the display.  
There is a problem with the I2C bus if  
Both D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve Driver PCA are ON/OFF Constantly and pressing a key on  
the front panel DOES NOT results in a change to the display.  
If the keyboard interface is working but either of the two Watchdog LEDs is not flashing, the problem may be a  
wiring issue between the board and the motherboard  
11.4.5. KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE  
The front panel keyboard, display and Keyboard Display Interface PCA can be verified by observing the  
operation of the display when power is applied to the instrument and when a key is pressed on the front panel.  
Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly:  
The vacuum fluorescent display is good if on power-up a “-“ character is visible on the upper left hand  
corner of the display.  
If there is no “-“ character on the display at power-up and D1 on the Relay PCA or D2 on the valve driver  
PCA is flashing then the Keyboard/Display Interface PCA is bad.  
The CPU Status LED, DS5, is flashing, but there is no “-“ character on the display at power-up  
188  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
If the calibrator starts operation with a normal display but pressing a key on the front panel does not  
change the display, then there are three possible problems.  
One or more of the keys are bad,  
The interrupt signal between the Keyboard Display interface and the motherboard is broken, or  
The Keyboard Display Interface PCA is bad.  
11.4.6. RELAY PCA  
The Relay PCA can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the status LEDs located along its  
upper edge (see Section 11.3.2 and Figure 11-3:Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting), and using  
the SIGNAL I/O submenu under the DIAG menu (see Section 11.1.3) to toggle each LED ON or OFF.  
If D1 on the Relay PCA is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question (Pump power, Heater  
power, Valve Drive, etc.) toggles properly using the Signal I/O function, then the associated control device on the  
Relay PCA is bad. Several of the control devices are in sockets and can be easily replaced. The table below  
lists the control device associated with a particular function.  
Table 11-8: Relay PCA Control Devices  
CONTROL  
DEVICE  
Q2  
FUNCTION  
IN SOCKET  
UV Lamp Heater  
O3 Gen Heater  
No  
No  
Q3  
All Valves  
U5  
Yes  
No  
AC Dry air Pump  
DC Photometer Pump  
K1  
U1  
No  
11.4.7. PHOTOMETER O3 GENERATOR PRESSURE /FLOW  
SENSOR ASSEMBLY  
This assembly is only present in calibrators with O3 generator and/or photometer options installed. The  
pressure/flow sensor PCA, located at the rear of the instrument between the O3 generator and the photometer  
pump (see Figure 3-3) can be checked with a Voltmeter. The following procedure assumes that the wiring is  
intact and that the motherboard as well as the power supplies are operating properly:  
BASIC PCA OPERATION:  
Measure the voltage across C1 it should be 5 VDC ± 0.25 VDC. If not then the board is bad  
Measure the voltage between TP2 and TP1 C1 it should be 1o VDC ± 0.25 VDC. If not then the board is  
bad.  
05744 Rev B  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR:  
1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S1 with an external pressure meter.  
2. Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1.  
The expected value for this signal should be:  
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 20 Hg-in-A, the expected voltage level between TP4 and  
TP1 would be between 2870 mVDC and 3510 mVDC.  
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 25 Hg-in-A, the expected voltage level between TP4 and  
TP1 would be between 3533 mVDC and 4318 mVDC.  
If this voltage is out of range, then either pressure transducer S1 is bad, the board is bad or there is a  
pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure  
properly.  
O3 GENERATOR PRESSURE SENSOR  
1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S2 with an external pressure meter.  
2. Measure the voltage across TP5 and TP1.  
The expected value for this signal should be:  
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 25 psig, the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1  
would be between 3470 mVDC and 4245 mVDC.  
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 30 psig, the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1  
would be between 4030 mVDC and 4930 mVDC.  
If this voltage is out of range, then either pressure transducer S1 is bad, the board is bad or there is a  
pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure  
properly.  
PHOTOMETER FLOW SENSOR  
Measure the voltage across TP3 and TP1.  
With proper flow (800 cc3/min through the photometer), this should be approximately 4.5V (this  
voltage will vary with altitude).  
With flow stopped (photometer inlet disconnected or pump turned OFF) the voltage should be  
approximately 1V.  
If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor S3 is bad, the board is bad or there is a leak upstream of  
the sensor.  
190  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11.4.8. MOTHERBOARD  
11.4.8.1. A/D Functions  
The simplest method to check the operation of the A-to-D converter on the motherboard is to use the Signal I/O  
function under the DIAG menu to check the two A/D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily  
measured with a voltmeter.  
1. Use the Signal I/O function (See Section 11.1.3 and Appendix A) to view the value of REF_4096_MV  
and REF_GND. If both are within 3 mV of nominal (4096 and 0), and are stable, ±0.5 mV then the basic  
A/D is functioning properly. If not then the motherboard is bad.  
2. Choose a parameter in the Signal I/O function such as PHOTO_LAMP_DRIVE, O3_GEN_TEMP or  
PHOTO_FLOW.  
Compare these voltages at their origin (see the interconnect drawing and interconnect list in  
Appendix D) with the voltage displayed through the signal I/O function.  
If the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and displayed voltage (±10  
mV) then the motherboard is bad.  
11.4.8.2. Test Channel / Analog Outputs Voltage  
To verify that the analog output is working properly, connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform an  
analog output step test as follows:  
STANDBY  
ACT =STANDBY  
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ  
SETUP  
Make sure that  
the M700E is  
in standby  
mode.  
SETUP X.X  
PRIMARY SETUP MENU  
O3  
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE  
EXIT  
SETUP X.X  
SECONDARY SETUP MENU  
EXIT  
COMM VARS DIAG  
SETUP X.X  
ENTER PASSWORD  
0
0
0
ENTR EXIT  
Toggle these  
keys to enter the  
correct  
PASSWORD  
DIAG  
SIGNAL I/O  
PREV NEXT  
ENTR EXIT  
DIAG AOUT  
ANALOG OUTPUT  
ANALOG OUTPUT  
Performs analog  
output step test  
0% to 100%  
10%  
EXIT  
EXIT  
DIAG AOUT  
[10%]  
Pressing the key under “0%” pause the  
test. Brackets will appear around the  
value: EXAMPLE: [20%]  
Pressing the same key again will  
resume the test.  
05744 Rev B  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
For each of the steps the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the  
0% step, which should be within 0mV ±2 to 3 mV. Make sure you take into account any offset that may have  
been programmed into channel (See Section 6.9.1.5).  
Table 11-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs  
FULL SCALE OUTPUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE  
(see Section 6.9.1.3)  
100MV  
1V  
5V  
10V  
STEP  
%
0
NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
2
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
20 mV  
40 mV  
60 mV  
80 mV  
100 mV  
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1.0  
4
6
8
10  
If one or more of the steps fails to be within these ranges, it is likely that there has been a failure of the either or  
both of the DACs and their associated circuitry on the motherboard.  
11.4.8.3. Status Outputs  
To test the status output electronics:  
1. Connect a jumper between the “D“ pin and the “” pin on the status output connector.  
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested.  
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested (see table below).  
4. Under the DIAGSIGNAL I/O menu (See Section11.1.3), scroll through the inputs and outputs until  
you get to the output in question.  
5. Alternately, turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter.  
It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF.  
Table 11-10: Status Outputs Check  
PIN  
STATUS  
(LEFT TO RIGHT)  
1
ST_SYSTEM_OK  
SPARE  
2
3
ST_CAL_ACTIVE  
ST_DIAG_MODE  
ST_TEMP_ALARM  
ST_PRESS_ALARM  
SPARE  
4
5
6
7 and 8  
192  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11.4.8.4. Control Inputs  
Table 11-11: M703E Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions  
CONNECTOR  
Top  
INPUT  
CORRESPONDING I/O SIGNAL  
CONTROL_IN_1  
CONTROL_IN_2  
CONTROL_IN_3  
CONTROL_IN_4  
CONTROL_IN_5  
CONTROL_IN_6  
CONTROL_IN_7  
CONTROL_IN_8  
CONTROL_IN_9  
CONTROL_IN_10  
CONTROL_IN_11  
CONTROL_IN_12  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Top  
Top  
Top  
Top  
Top  
Bottom  
Bottom  
Bottom  
Bottom  
Bottom  
Bottom  
J
K
L
The control input bits can be tested by applying a trigger voltage to an input and watching changes in the status  
of the associated function under the SIGNAL I/O submenu:  
EXAMPLE: to test the “A” control input:  
1. Under the DIAGSIGNAL I/O menu (See Section11.1.3), scroll through the inputs and outputs until  
you get to the output named 0) CONTROL_IN_1.  
2. Connect a jumper from the “+” pin on the appropriate connector to the “U” on the same connector.  
3. Connect a second jumper from the “” pin on the connector to the “A” pin.  
4. The status of 0) CONTROL_IN_1 should change to read “ON”.  
05744 Rev B  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
11.4.8.5. Control Outputs  
Table 11-12: Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions Check  
PIN (LEFT TO RIGHT)  
STATUS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CONTROL_OUT_1  
CONTROL_OUT_2  
CONTROL_OUT_3  
CONTROL_OUT_4  
CONTROL_OUT_5  
CONTROL_OUT_6  
CONTROL_OUT_7  
CONTROL_OUT_8  
8
9
CONTROL_OUT_9  
CONTROL_OUT_10  
CONTROL_OUT_11  
CONTROL_OUT_12  
10  
11  
12  
To test the Control Output electronics:  
1. Connect a jumper between the “E“ pin and the “” pin on the status output connector.  
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested.  
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested (see Table 11-12).  
4. Under the DIAGSIGNAL I/O menu (See Section11.1.3), scroll through the inputs and outputs until  
you get to the output in question.  
5. Alternately, turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter.  
It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF.  
11.4.9. CPU  
There are two major types of failures associated with the CPU board: complete failure and a failure associated  
with the Disk-On Chip on the CPU board. If either of these failures occur, contact the factory.  
For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact,  
the CPU is bad if on powering the instrument:  
The vacuum fluorescent display shows a dash in the upper left hand corner.  
The CPU Status LED, DS5, is not flashing. (See Section 11.1.4.1.)  
There is no activity from the primary RS-232 port on the rear panel even if “? <ret>” is pressed.  
In some rare circumstances this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard, specifically U57  
the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If this is true, removing U57 from its  
socket will allow the instrument to startup but the measurements will be incorrect.  
If the calibrator stops part way through initialization (there are words on the vacuum fluorescent display)  
then it is likely that the DOC has been corrupted.  
194  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11.4.10. RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS  
11.4.10.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting  
Teledyne Instruments calibrators use the RS-232 communications protocol to allow the instrument to be  
connected to a variety of computer-based equipment. RS-232 has been used for many years and as equipment  
has become more advanced, connections between various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult.  
Generally, every manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully.  
Problems with RS-232 connections usually center around four general areas:  
Incorrect cabling and connectors. See Section 7.1.2 for connector and pin-out information.  
The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured. See Section 7.1.3.  
If a modem is being used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed. See Section 7.2  
Incorrect setting of the DTE – DCE Switch is set correctly. See Section 7.1.1.  
Verify that cable (03596) that connects the serial COM ports of the CPU to J12 of the motherboard is  
properly seated  
11.4.10.2. Troubleshooting Calibrator/Modem or Terminal Operation  
These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne Instruments  
calibrator.  
Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.  
Check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct position as described in Section 7.1.1.  
Check to make sure the set up command is correct (See Section 7.2)  
Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The M703E sets pin 7 (RTS) to greater than 3  
volts to enable modem transmission.  
Make sure the BAUD rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and calibrator match, See  
Section 7.1.3.  
Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or computer; See Section  
7.1.5  
Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the calibrator (holding down the space bar is  
one way); the green LED should flicker as the instrument is receiving data.  
Make sure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is functioning properly.  
NOTE  
Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232 Programming Notes”  
Teledyne Instruments part number 013500000.  
05744 Rev B  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
11.4.11. TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS  
Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the UV lamp and ozone generator. If any of these  
temperatures are out of range or are poorly controlled, the M703E will perform poorly.  
11.4.11.1. Box / Chassis Temperature  
The box temperature sensor is mounted to the Motherboard and cannot be disconnected to check its resistance.  
Rather check the BOX TEMP signal using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu (see Section 11.1.3).  
This parameter will vary with ambient temperature, but at ~30oC (6-7above room temperature) the signal  
should be ~1450 mV.  
11.4.11.2. Photometer Sample Chamber Temperature  
The temperature of the gas in the photometer sample chamber should read approximately 5.0C higher than the  
box temperature.  
11.4.11.3. UV Lamp Temperature  
There are three possible causes for the UV Lamp temperature to have failed.  
The UV Lamp heater has failed. Check the resistance between pins 5 and 6 on the six-pin connector  
adjacent to the UV Lamp on the Optical Bench.  
It should be approximately 30 Ohms.  
Assuming that the I2C bus is working and that there is no other failure with the Relay board, the FET  
Driver on the Relay Board may have failed.  
Using the PHOTO_LAMP HEATER parameter under the SIGNAL I/O function of the DIAG menu, as  
described above, turn on and off the UV Lamp Heater (D15 on the relay board should illuminate as  
the heater is turned on).  
Check the DC voltage present between pin 1 and 2 on J13 of the Relay Board.  
If the FET Driver has failed, there will be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 2.  
If the FET Driver Q2 checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor in the lamp assembly may have  
failed.  
Unplug the connector to the UV Lamp Heater/Thermistor PCB, and measure the resistance of the  
thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6-pin connector.  
The resistance near the 58oC set point is ~8.1k ohms.  
196  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11.4.11.4. Ozone Generator Temperature  
There are three possible causes for the Ozone Generator temperature to have failed.  
The O3 generator heater has failed. Check the resistance between pins 5 and 6 on the 6-pin connector  
adjacent to the UV Lamp on the O3 Generator. It should be approximately 5 Ohms.  
Assuming that the I2C bus is working and that there is no other failure with the Relay board, the FET  
Driver on the Relay Board may have failed. Using the O3_GEN_HEATER parameter under the SIGNAL  
I/O function of the DIAG menu, as described above, turn on and off the UV Lamp Heater. Check the DC  
voltage present between pin 1 and 2 on J14 of the Relay Board.  
If the FET Driver has failed, there should be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 2.  
If the FET Driver checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor in the lamp assembly may have  
failed. Unplug the connector to the Ozone Generator Heater/Thermistor PCB, and measure the  
resistance of the thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6-pin connector.  
11.5. TROUBLESHOOTING THE O3 PHOTOMETER  
11.5.1. DYNAMIC PROBLEMS WITH THE O3 PHOTOMETER  
Dynamic problems are problems, which only manifest themselves when the photometer is measuring O3  
concentration gas mixtures. These can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve.  
Since many photometer behaviors that appear to be a dynamic in nature are often a symptom of a seemingly  
unrelated static problems, it is recommended that dynamic problems not be addressed until all static problems,  
warning conditions and subsystems have been checked and any problems found are resolved.  
Once this has been accomplished, the following most common dynamic problems should be checked.  
11.5.1.1. Noisy or Unstable O3 Readings at Zero  
Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 10.2  
Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone.  
Confirm that the Source Lamp is fully inserted and that the lamp hold-down thumb- screw is tight.  
Check for a dirty Absorption Cell and/or pneumatic lines. Clean as necessary as described in Section  
10.2  
Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench (the pneumatic line at the lamp end of the bench) and  
plug the port in the bench. If readings remain noisy, the problem is in one of the electronic sections of the  
instrument. If readings become quiet, the problem is in the instrument's pneumatics.  
05744 Rev B  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
11.5.1.2. Noisy, Unstable, or Non-Linear Span O3 Readings  
Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section10.2.  
Check for proper operation of the meas/ref switching valve as described in Section11.5.2.  
Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10.2  
Check for operation of the A/D circuitry on the motherboard. See Section 11.4.8.1.  
Confirm the Sample Temperature, Sample Pressure and Sample Flow readings are correct. Check and  
adjust as required.  
11.5.1.3. Slow Response to Changes in Concentration  
Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10.2  
Check for pneumatic leaks as described in Section 10.2  
Check for improper materials in the inlet manifold.  
The photometer needs 800 cc3/min of gas flow. Make sure that this is accounted for when calculating total  
required output flow for the calibrator (see Section 3.4.7).  
11.5.1.4. The Analog Output Signal Level Does Not Agree With Front Panel Readings  
Confirm that the recorder offset (see Section 6.9.1.5) is set to zero.  
Perform an AIO calibration (see Section 6.9.2) and photometer dark calibration (see Section 8.1.4).  
11.5.1.5. Cannot Zero  
Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 10.2.  
Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone.  
The photometer needs 800 cc3/min of gas flow. Make sure that this is accounted for when calculating total  
required output flow for the calibrator (see Section 3.4.7).  
11.5.1.6. Cannot Span  
Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10.2.  
Check for proper operation of the meas/ref switching valve as described in Section11.5.2.  
Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10.2  
Check for operation of the A/D circuitry on the motherboard. See Section 11.4.8.1.  
Confirm the Sample Temperature, Sample Pressure and Sample Flow readings are correct. Check and  
adjust as required.  
The photometer needs 800 cc3/min of gas flow. Make sure that this is accounted for when calculating  
total required output flow for the calibrator (see Section 3.4.7).  
198  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11.5.2. CHECKING MEASURE / REFERENCE VALVE  
To check the function of the photometer’s measure / reference valve:  
1. Set the calibrator’s front panel display to show the PHOTO REFERENCE test function (see Section 6.1).  
2. Follow the instruction in Sections 8.1.1 and 8.1.3.1 for performing a zero point calibration of the  
photometer.  
Press XZRO and allow the calibrator to stabilize.  
3. Before completing the calibration by pressing the ZERO key, note of the displayed value.  
4. Press the final Zero key, then press “NO” when asked, “ARE YOU SURE”.  
5. Follow the instruction in Section 8.1.3.2 for performing a span point calibration of the photometer.  
Press XSPN and allow the calibrator to stabilize.  
6. Before completing the calibration by pressing the SPAN key, note of the displayed value of PHOTO  
REF.  
If the O3 REF value has decreased by more than 2 mV from its value with Zero-gas, then there is a  
"cross-port" leak in the m/r valve.  
7. Press the final Zero key then press “NO” when asked, “ARE YOU SURE”.  
05744 Rev B  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
11.6. TROUBLESHOOTING THE O3 GENERATOR  
11.6.1. CHECKING THE UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY  
NOTE  
A schematic and physical diagram of the Lamp Power Supply can be found in Appendix D.  
WARNING  
Hazardous voltage present - use caution.  
It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of the UV Lamp or the Lamp  
Power Supply, however, the following steps will provide a reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power  
Supply.  
1. Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that +15VDC is present  
between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector.  
2. If this voltage is incorrect, check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described in Section 11.4.3.  
3. Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following voltages on the UV  
lamp power supply PCA (see Figure 9-21):  
+4500 mVDC ± 10 mVDC between TP1 and TP4 (grnd)  
If this voltage is incorrect, either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or the I2C bus is not  
communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA.  
+5VDC between TP3 and TP4 (grnd)  
If this voltages is les than 4.8 or greater than 5.25 either the 5 VDC power supply or the UV lamp  
power supply PCA are faulty...  
If the above voltages check out, it is more likely that a problem is due to the UV Lamp than due to the  
Lamp Power Supply.  
Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists, replace the Lamp Power Supply.  
200  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11.7. TROUBLE SHOOTING THE OPTIONAL O3 GENERATOR  
The only significant components of the O3 generator that might reasonable malfunction is the power supply  
assembly for the UV source lamp and the lamp itself.  
11.7.1. CHECKING THE UV SOURCE LAMP POWER SUPPLY  
NOTE  
A schematic and physical diagram of the Lamp Power Supply can be found in Appendix D.  
WARNING  
Hazardous voltage present - use caution.  
It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of the UV Lamp or the Lamp  
Power Supply, however, the following steps will provide a reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power  
Supply.  
1. Make sure the calibrator is in STANDBY mode.  
2. Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that +15VDC is present  
between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector.  
3. If this voltage is incorrect, check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described in Section 11.4.3.  
4. Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following voltages on the UV  
lamp power supply PCA (see Figure 9-21):  
+800 mVDC ± 10 mVDC between TP1 and TP4 (grnd)  
If this voltage is incorrect, either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or the I2C bus is not  
communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA.  
+5VDC between TP3 and TP4 (grnd)  
If this voltages is less than 4.8 or greater than 5.25 either the 5 VDC power supply or the UV lamp  
power supply PCA are faulty.  
If the above voltages check out, it is more likely that a problem is due to the UV Lamp than due to the  
Lamp Power Supply.  
Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists, replace the Lamp Power Supply.  
05744 Rev B  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
11.8. REPAIR PROCEDURES  
11.8.1. REPAIRING SAMPLE FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLY  
The critical flow orifice is housed in the flow control assembly (Teledyne Instruments part number: 001760400)  
located on the top of the optical bench. A sintered filter protects the jewel orifice so it is unusual for the orifice to  
need replacing, but if it does, or the filter needs replacement please use the following procedure (see the Spare  
Parts list in Appendix B for part numbers and kits):  
1. Turn off power to the calibrator.  
2. Locate the assembly to be repaired, see Figure, 3–3.  
3. Disconnect the pneumatic connection from the flow assembly.  
4. Remove the fitting and the components as shown in the exploded view in Figure 11.6.  
5. Replace the o-rings (p/n OR000001) and the sintered filter (p/n FL000001).  
6. If replacing the critical flow orifice itself (P/N 000941000), make sure that the side with the colored  
window (usually red) is facing downstream to the gas flow.  
7. Apply new Teflon® tape to the male connector threads  
8. Re-assemble in reverse order.  
Pneumatic Connector, Male 1/8”  
(P/N FT_70  
Spring  
(P/N HW_20)  
Sintered Filter  
(P/N FL_01)  
Critical Flow Orifice  
(P/N 000941000)  
Make sure it is placed with the  
jewel down)  
O-Ring  
(P/N OR_01)  
Purge Housing  
(P/N 000850000)  
Figure 11-5:  
Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly Disassembly  
202  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
11.8.2. DISK-ON-CHIP REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE  
NOTE  
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by the  
human nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will  
void the instrument warranty.  
See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage.  
Replacing the Disk-on-Chip may be necessary in certain rare circumstances or to load new instrument software.  
This will cause all of the instrument configuration parameters to be lost. However a backup copy of the  
operating parameters are stored in a second non-volatile memory and will be loaded into the new the Disk-on-  
Chip on power-up. To change the Disk-on-Chip, follow this procedure.  
1. Turn off power to the instrument.  
2. Fold down the rear panel by loosening the captive Phillips-head screws on each side  
3. Locate the Disk-on-Chip in the rightmost socket near the right hand side of the CPU assembly. Remove  
the IC by gently prying it up from the socket.  
4. Reinstall the new Disk-on-Chip, making sure the notch in the end of the chip is facing upward.  
5. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine.  
11.9. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE  
If this manual and its trouble-shooting / repair sections do not solve your problems, technical assistance may be  
obtained from  
TELEDYNE-API, CUSTOMER SERVICE,  
9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE  
SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA 92121-5201  
USA  
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190  
Phone: 858-657-9800  
Fax: 858-657-9816  
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/  
Before you contact customer service, fill out the problem report form in Appendix C, which is also available  
online for electronic submission at http://www.teledyne-api.com/forms/.  
USER NOTES:  
05744 Rev B  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
USER NOTES:  
204  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge  
12. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE  
Teledyne Instruments considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be  
extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time.  
This section describes how static electricity occurs, why it is so dangerous to electronic components and  
assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring.  
12.1. HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED  
Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer, are very  
small, require very little power and operate very quickly. Unfortunately, the same characteristics that allow them  
to do these things also make them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity.  
Controlling electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro-static charges occur in the first place.  
Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the  
surface layers of two materials rub against each other. As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and  
separate, some electrons from one surface are retained by the other.  
Materials  
Makes  
Contact  
Materials  
Separate  
+
+
+
+
PROTONS = 3  
ELECTRONS = 2  
PROTONS = 3  
ELECTRONS = 4  
PROTONS = 3  
ELECTRONS = 3  
PROTONS = 3  
ELECTRONS = 3  
NET CHARGE = -1  
NET CHARGE = +1  
NET CHARGE = 0  
NET CHARGE = 0  
Figure 12-1:  
Triboelectric Charging  
If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded, the resulting positive or  
negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place, or static. The most common example of  
triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon  
carpet or linoleum tiled floor. With each step, electrons change places and the resulting electro-static charge  
builds up, quickly reaching significant levels. Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench, using  
a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of StyrofoamTM pellets during shipment can also build  
hefty static charges  
Table 12-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities  
MEANS OF GENERATION  
Walking across nylon carpet  
Walking across vinyl tile  
Worker at bench  
65-90% RH  
1,500V  
250V  
10-25% RH  
35,000V  
12,000V  
6,000V  
100V  
Poly bag picked up from bench  
1,200V  
20,000V  
Moving around in a chair padded  
with urethane foam  
1,500V  
18,000V  
05744 Rev B  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
12.2. HOW ELECTRO-STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE  
Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device. Current  
flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels  
of the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits, melting them or even vaporizing parts of  
them. When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro-static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb  
craters littered across the landscape of the component’s circuitry.  
A quick comparison of the values in Table 12-1 with the those shown in the Table 12-2, listing device  
susceptibility levels, shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 60% of device  
failures are the result of damage due to electro-static discharge.  
Table 12-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD  
DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE  
RANGE  
DEVICE  
DAMAGE BEGINS  
OCCURRING AT  
CATASTROPHIC  
DAMAGE AT  
MOSFET  
VMOS  
10  
100  
30  
1800  
100  
NMOS  
60  
GaAsFET  
EPROM  
60  
2000  
100  
100  
140  
150  
190  
200  
300  
300  
300  
500  
500  
500  
JFET  
7000  
500  
SAW  
Op-AMP  
CMOS  
2500  
3000  
2500  
3000  
7000  
500  
Schottky Diodes  
Film Resistors  
This Film Resistors  
ECL  
SCR  
1000  
2500  
Schottky TTL  
Potentially damaging electro-static discharges can occur:  
Any time a charged surface (including the human body) discharges to a device. Even simple contact of a  
finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage. A  
similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object, such as a metallic tool or fixture.  
When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface  
such as packaging materials, work surfaces, machine surfaces or other device. In some cases, charged  
device discharges can be the most destructive.  
A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring  
harness of the equipment in which it is to function. If the assembly is carrying a static charge, as it is  
connected to ground a discharge will occur.  
Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro-static field, a charge may be  
induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device. If the device is then momentarily  
grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and  
grounded somewhere else, a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to  
ground.  
206  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge  
12.3. COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE  
I didn’t feel a shock so there was no electro-static discharge: The human nervous system is not able  
to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts. Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much  
lower than that.  
I didn’t touch it so there was no electro-static discharge: Electro Static charges are fields whose  
lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the  
charge.  
It still works so there was no damage: Sometimes the damaged caused by electro-static discharge can  
completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately. More likely, the trace will be only  
partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse, weakening the  
trace. This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time, but even the very low voltage  
and current levels of the device’s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing  
the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached.  
These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged  
device is installed causes down time, lost data, lost productivity, as well as possible failure and damage  
to other pieces of equipment or property.  
Static Charges can’t build up on a conductive surface: There are two errors in this statement.  
Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded. The charge will be equalized  
across the entire device, but without access to earth ground, they are still trapped and can still build to  
high enough levels to cause damage when discharged.  
A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and/or discharge triggered in the presence of a  
charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking  
up to a workbench.  
As long as my analyzer is properly installed, it is safe from damage caused by static discharges:  
It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its  
electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves. This does not  
prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things, like you and your clothing, from discharging  
through the instrument and damaging it.  
12.4. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL  
It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges. It is not, however difficult to prevent  
those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro-static discharge from  
occurring.  
12.4.1. GENERAL RULES  
Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station. Setting up an ESD safe  
workstation need not be complicated. A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is  
needed to create a basic anti-ESD workstation.  
Protective Mat  
Wrist Stra  
Ground Point  
Figure 12-2:  
Basic anti-ESD Work Station  
05744 Rev B  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TELEDYNE API  
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
For technicians that work in the field, special lightweight and portable anti-ESD kits are available from most  
suppliers of ESD protection gear. These include everything needed to create a temporary anti-ESD work area  
anywhere.  
Always wear an Anti-ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer.  
An anti-ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded  
objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels.  
Anti-ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no  
available grounded plug.  
Also, anti-ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor (usually around one meg-ohm) that protects  
you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument’s power supply.  
Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient. While this may temporarily bleed off static  
charges present at the time, once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will  
immediately begin to re-build. In some conditions, a charge large enough to damage a component can  
rebuild in just a few seconds.  
Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti-ESD storage bags or bins: Even when  
you are not working on them, store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti-Static bag or bin. This will  
prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from  
discharging through it.  
Use metallic anti-ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies  
rather than pink-poly bags. The famous, pink-poly bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with  
a liquid (similar to liquid laundry detergent) which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic  
creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag.  
While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag, it does not prevent the build  
up of static charges. If laying on a conductive, grounded surface, these bags will allow charges to bleed  
away but the very charges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the  
bag by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device. Also, the liquid impregnating the plastic  
is eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary  
plastic bag.  
Anti-Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal (usually silvery in color) provide all of the charge  
equalizing abilities of the pink-poly bags but also, when properly sealed, create a Faraday cage that  
completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges.  
Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon (usually black in color) are also excellent at  
dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges.  
Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti-ESD  
bag. The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape, such as Scotch® tape, from its roll will  
generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an  
associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away.  
208  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge  
12.4.2. BASIC ANTI-ESD PROCEDURES FOR ANALYZER REPAIR AND  
MAINTENANCE  
12.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack  
When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power  
supply  
1. Attach you anti-ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else.  
Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to any bare metal portion of the  
instrument chassis.  
This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its  
components are connected.  
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.  
3. Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work. Up to this point, the closed metal casing of your  
analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induced static  
charges.  
4. If you must remove a component from the instrument, do not lay it down on a non-ESD preventative  
surface where static charges may lie in wait.  
5. Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer.  
12.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench.  
When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on a anti-ESD work bench  
1. Plug you anti-ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before touching any items  
on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away. This will allow any charges you are  
carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to  
field effects and induction from occurring.  
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.  
3. Only open any anti-ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have  
plugged your wrist strap into the workstation.  
Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface.  
Before opening the container, wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of  
the container to be bled away by the workstation’s grounded protective mat.  
4. Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD Sensitive  
Device.  
Only lay tools or ESD-sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your  
workstation. Never lay them down on any non-ESD preventative surface.  
5. Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti-static storage bags or bins and close the bag or  
bin before unplugging your wrist strap.  
6. Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench.  
05744 Rev B  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TELEDYNE API  
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
12.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back  
When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne Instruments analyzer to an Anti-ESD workbench  
or back:  
1. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation.  
2. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.  
3. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:  
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a  
ground point.  
If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface.  
In either case wait several seconds.  
4. Place the item in the container.  
5. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape.  
Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields.  
Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming  
a complete protective envelope around the device.  
6. Once you have arrived at your destination, allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag  
or bin during travel to dissipate:  
Connect your wrist strap to ground.  
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a  
ground point.  
If you are at a anti-ESD work bench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface  
In either case wait several seconds  
7. Open the container.  
12.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.  
Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric  
charges. To prevent damage from ESD, Teledyne Instruments ships all electronic components and assemblies  
in properly sealed ant-ESD containers.  
Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti-ESD container during shipping as the packing  
materials vibrate and rub against each other. To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or  
assemblies being shipped make sure that you:  
Always unpack shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service by:  
1. Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti-ESD work area  
2. Carry the still sealed ant-ESD bag, tube or bin to the anti-ESD work area  
3. Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 12.4.2.3 above when opening the anti-ESD container at the work station  
4. Reserve the anti-ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be  
returned to Teledyne Instruments  
210  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge  
12.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.  
Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service in  
anti-ESD bins, tubes or bags.  
WARNING  
DO NOT use pink-poly bags.  
NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the electronic  
component/assembly directly  
This includes, but is not limited to, plastic bubble-pack, Styrofoam peanuts,  
open cell foam, closed cell foam, and adhesive tape  
DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer. Use ONLY anti-ESD tape  
1. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.  
2. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:  
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a  
ground point.  
If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface.  
In either case wait several seconds.  
3. Place the item in the container.  
4. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape.  
Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields.  
Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming  
a complete protective envelope around the device.  
NOTE  
If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti-ESD bags or containers available, Teledyne  
Instruments’ Customer Service department will supply them (see Section 11.9 for contact information).  
Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation.  
USER NOTES:  
05744 Rev B  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELEDYNE API  
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge  
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual  
USER NOTES:  
212  
05744 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX A – Version Specific Software Documentation  
APPENDIX A – Version Specific Software Documentation  
APPENDIX A-1: Model 703E Software Menu Trees, Software Version C.0  
APPENDIX A-2: Model 703E Setup Variables Available Via Serial I/O, Software Version C.0  
APPENDIX A-3: Model 703E Warnings and Test Measurements Via Serial I/O, Software Version C.0  
APPENDIX A-4: Model 703E Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0  
APPENDIX A-5: Model M703E Terminal Command Designators, Software Version C.0  
05745 Rev C  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
APPENDIX A – Version Specific Software Documentation  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES:  
A-2  
05745 Rev C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0  
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0  
Table A-1: M703E Setup Variables, Software Version C.0  
M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION  
NUMERI  
C UNITS  
DEFAULT  
VALUE  
SETUP VARIABLE  
VALUE RANGE  
DESCRIPTION  
Low Access Level Setup Variables (818 password)  
58  
Photometer lamp temperature set point and warning  
limits.  
ºC  
ºC  
0–100  
0–100  
PHOTO_LAMP  
O3_GEN_LAMP  
Warnings:  
56–61  
48  
O3 generator lamp temperature set point and  
warning limits.  
Warnings:  
43–53  
O3 concentration range for test channel analog  
output.  
PPB  
500  
OFF  
ON  
0.1–20000  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
O3_CONC_RANGE  
O3 bench control flag. ON turns on pump and  
switches measure/reference valve only in bench  
generation mode.  
O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY  
Zero air pump control. ON turns on zero air  
pump when generating ozone.  
ZA_PUMP_ENAB  
ºC  
“Hg  
25  
29.92  
0
0–100  
15–50  
-60–60  
Standard temperature for unit conversions.  
Standard pressure for unit conversions.  
Time-of-day clock speed adjustment.  
STD_TEMP  
STD_PRESS  
CLOCK_ADJ  
Sec./Day  
Medium Access Level Setup Variables (929 password)  
ENGL,  
Selects the language to use for the user interface.  
ENGL  
SECD,  
EXTN  
Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from  
the RS-232 interface.  
LANGUAGE_SELECT  
MAINT_TIMEOUT  
Time until automatically switching out of software-  
controlled maintenance mode.  
Hours  
2
0.1–100  
Seconds  
Samples  
2.5  
1
0.1–30  
1–30  
Dwell time after switching measure/reference valve.  
Number of O3 detector readings to sample.  
O3_DWELL  
O3_SAMPLE  
Photometer dark offset for measure and reference  
readings.  
mV  
0
-1000–1000  
DARK_OFFSET  
Samples  
Samples  
32  
6
1–100  
1–100  
Moving average filter size.  
FILT_SIZE  
Moving average filter size in adaptive mode.  
FILT_ASIZE  
Absolute concentration difference to trigger adaptive  
filter.  
PPB  
20  
5
1–1000  
1–100  
FILT_DELTA  
FILT_PCT  
Percent concentration difference to trigger adaptive  
filter.  
Percent  
Seconds  
60  
ON  
0
0–60  
Delay before leaving adaptive filter mode.  
ON enables adaptive filter; OFF disables it.  
FILT_DELAY  
FILT_ADAPT  
PDELTA_GAIN 2  
OFF, ON  
-200–200  
PPB/dIn-  
Hg  
Multiplied by difference between measure and  
reference pressure and added to concentration.  
PDELTA_CAL_DUR 2  
Minutes  
5
0.1–20  
Duration of pressure compensation calibration  
procedure.  
1.0  
1
0.1–10  
Constant factor to keep visible slope near 1.  
O3 photometer slope.  
O3_SLOPE_CONST  
O3_SLOPE  
0.850–1.150  
-1000–1000  
PPB  
0
O3 photometer offset.  
O3_OFFSET  
Target O3 concentration during bench span  
calibration.  
PPB  
400  
0.1–10000  
O3_BCAL_SET  
05745 Rev C  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION  
NUMERI  
C UNITS  
DEFAULT  
VALUE  
SETUP VARIABLE  
O3_PUMP_STARTUP  
O3_PUMP_MIN_FLOW  
VALUE RANGE  
OFF, ON  
DESCRIPTION  
O3 pump startup enable. ON enables startup  
procedure.  
ON  
0.2  
Minimum flow rate that indicates O3 pump is  
on.  
LPM  
0–1  
Seconds  
Seconds  
Seconds  
30  
0.5  
10  
1–180  
0.1–10  
0.5–30  
O3 pump startup timeout.  
O3_PUMP_TIMEOUT  
O3_PUMP_PULSE  
PHOTO_CYCLE  
O3 pump power off pulse duration.  
Photometer lamp temperature control cycle period.  
Photometer lamp temperature PID proportional  
coefficient.  
0.5  
0.05  
0.2  
0–10  
0–10  
0–10  
PHOTO_PROP  
PHOTO_INTEG  
PHOTO_DERIV  
Photometer lamp temperature PID integral  
coefficient.  
Photometer lamp temperature PID derivative  
coefficient.  
1
0
0.001–100  
0–5000  
Slope term to correct photometer sample flow rate.  
O3 generator default drive setting.  
PHOTO_FLOW_SLOPE  
O3_DEF_DRIVE  
mV  
CNST,  
REF,  
O3 generator control mode. Enclose value in double  
quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface.  
BENCH  
O3_GEN_MODE  
BNCH  
O3 generator minimum reliable concentration. Less  
than this is treated as zero.  
PPB  
25  
0–100  
O3_MIN_CONC  
Seconds  
Seconds  
Samples  
60  
1
1–300  
1–60  
1–10  
0–10  
0–10  
1–300  
1–60  
1–10  
0–10  
0–10  
O3 generator reference feedback control delay.  
O3 generator reference adjustment frequency.  
O3 generator reference filter size.  
REF_DELAY  
REF_FREQ  
4
REF_FSIZE  
0.1  
0.2  
120  
10  
3
O3 generator reference PID integral coefficient.  
O3 generator reference PID derivative coefficient.  
O3 generator bench feedback control delay.  
O3 generator bench adjustment frequency.  
O3 generator bench filter size.  
REF_INTEG  
REF_DERIV  
Seconds  
Seconds  
Samples  
BENCH_DELAY  
BENCH_FREQ  
BENCH_FSIZE  
BENCH_INTEG  
BENCH_DERIV  
0.2  
0.5  
O3 generator bench PID integral coefficient.  
O3 generator bench PID derivative coefficient.  
O3 generator drive stability limit to update  
concentration cache.  
mV  
10  
0.1–100  
DRIVE_STABIL  
O3 generator cache un-normalized concentration  
resolution.  
PPB  
2
2
0.1–20  
0.5–30  
0–10  
CACHE_RESOL  
O3_LAMP_CYCLE  
O3_LAMP_PROP  
Seconds  
1/DegC  
O3 generator lamp temperature control cycle period.  
O3 generator lamp temperature PID proportional  
coefficient.  
0.2  
O3 generator lamp temperature PID integral  
coefficient.  
Gain  
0.01  
0–10  
O3_LAMP_INTEG  
O3 generator lamp temperature PID derivative  
coefficient.  
Gain  
0.2  
1
0–10  
O3_LAMP_DERIV  
OUTPUT_FLOW_SLOPE  
0.001–100  
Slope term to correct output flow rate.  
A-12  
05745 Rev C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0  
M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION  
NUMERI  
C UNITS  
DEFAULT  
VALUE  
SETUP VARIABLE  
RS232_MODE  
VALUE RANGE  
DESCRIPTION  
BitFlag  
0
0–65535  
RS-232 COM1 mode flags. Add values to combine  
flags.  
1 = quiet mode  
2 = computer mode  
4 = enable security  
8 = enable hardware handshaking  
32 = enable multi-drop  
64 = enable modem  
128 = ignore RS-232 line errors  
256 = disable XON / XOFF support  
512 = disable hardware FIFOs  
1024 = enable RS-485 mode  
2048 = even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit  
4096 = enable command prompt  
8192 = even parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit  
300,  
1200,  
2400,  
4800,  
RS-232 COM1 baud rate. Enclose value in double  
quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface.  
19200  
9600,  
BAUD_RATE  
19200,  
38400,  
57600,  
115200  
“AT Y0 &D0  
&H0 &I0  
S0=2 &B0  
&N6 &M0  
Any character in  
the allowed  
character set. Up  
to 100 characters  
long.  
RS-232 COM1 modem initialization string. Sent  
verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up  
or manually.  
MODEM_INIT  
E0 Q1 &W0”  
0
RS-232 COM2 mode flags.  
0
0–65535  
RS232_MODE2  
(Same settings as RS232_MODE.)  
300,  
1200,  
2400,  
4800,  
19200  
9600,  
RS-232 COM2 baud rate.  
BAUD_RATE2  
19200,  
38400,  
57600,  
115200  
“AT Y0 &D0  
&H0 &I0  
S0=2 &B0  
&N6 &M0  
Any character in  
the allowed  
character set. Up  
to 100 characters  
long.  
RS-232 COM2 modem initialization string. Sent  
verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up  
or manually.  
MODEM_INIT2  
E0 Q1 &W0”  
0
Password  
ms.  
940331  
0
0–999999  
0–1000  
RS-232 log on password.  
RS232_PASS  
LINE_DELAY 1  
MACHINE_ID  
RS-232 inter-line transmit delay (0=disabled).  
Unique ID number for instrument.  
ID  
700  
0–9999  
05745 Rev C  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION  
NUMERI  
C UNITS  
DEFAULT  
VALUE  
SETUP VARIABLE  
VALUE RANGE  
DESCRIPTION  
Any character in  
the allowed  
character set. Up  
to 100 characters  
long.  
RS-232 interface command prompt. Displayed only if  
enabled with RS232_MODE variable. Enclose value  
in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232  
interface.  
“Cmd> ”  
COMMAND_PROMPT  
NONE,  
O3 PHOTO  
MEAS,  
O3 PHOTO REF,  
O3 GEN REF,  
OUTPUT FLOW,  
REGULATOR  
PRESSURE,  
Diagnostic analog output ID. Enclose value in  
double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232  
interface.  
NONE  
SAMPLE  
PRESSURE,  
TEST_CHAN_ID  
SAMPLE FLOW,  
SAMPLE TEMP,  
PHOTO LAMP  
TEMP,  
O3 LAMP TEMP,  
CHASSIS TEMP,  
O3 PHOTO CONC  
ON enables passwords.  
OFF disables them.  
ON  
OFF, ON  
PASS_ENABLE  
Any string of  
exactly 12  
characters  
Default contact closure output pattern when not  
executing a sequence. Enclose value in double  
quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface.  
“000000000  
000”  
DEF_CC_OUTPUT  
consisting of the  
digits 0 and 1 only.  
mV  
4500  
ON  
0–5000  
Photometer lamp power setting.  
PHOTO_LAMP_POWER  
LAMP_PWR_ENABLE  
ON enables photometer lamp power cycling.  
OFF disables it.  
OFF, ON  
Hours  
24  
0.1  
20  
0.01–1000  
0.02–5  
Photometer lamp power cycling period.  
Length of time photometer lamp is turned off.  
Delay until valid concentration is computed.  
LAMP_PWR_PERIOD  
LAMP_OFF_DELAY  
DET_VALID_DELAY  
Seconds  
Seconds  
1–300  
Photometer reference standard deviation must be  
below this limit to switch out of startup mode.  
mV  
cm  
3
0.1–100  
REF_SDEV_LIMIT  
PATH_LENGTH  
41.96  
30  
0.01–99.999  
Photometer detector path length.  
Internal box temperature set point and warning  
limits.  
ºC  
0–100  
BOX_SET  
Warnings:  
5–45  
Molar mass of sample gas for computing  
concentrations by weight instead of volume.  
MolWt  
32  
1–99.999  
GAS_MOL_WEIGHT  
Any character in  
the allowed  
“00000000 ”  
character set. Up  
to 100 characters  
long.  
Unique serial number for instrument.  
SERIAL_NUMBER  
DISP_INTENSITY  
HIGH,  
MED,  
LOW,  
DIM  
Front panel display intensity. Enclose value in  
double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232  
interface.  
HIGH  
A-14  
05745 Rev C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0  
M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION  
NUMERI  
C UNITS  
DEFAULT  
VALUE  
SETUP VARIABLE  
VALUE RANGE  
DESCRIPTION  
ON  
OFF, ON  
I2C bus automatic reset enable.  
I2C_RESET_ENABLE  
Time-of-day clock format flags. Enclose value in  
double quotes (“) when setting from the RS-232  
interface.  
“%a” = Abbreviated weekday name.  
“%b” = Abbreviated month name.  
“%d” = Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31).  
“%H” = Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23).  
“%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12).  
“%j” = Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366).  
“%m” = Month as decimal number (01 – 12).  
“%M” = Minute as decimal number (00 – 59).  
“%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock.  
“%S” = Second as decimal number (00 – 59).  
Any character in  
the allowed  
character set. Up  
to 100 characters  
long.  
“TIME=%H:  
%M:%S”  
CLOCK_FORMAT  
“%w” = Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday  
is 0).  
“%y” = Year without century, as decimal number (00  
– 99).  
“%Y” = Year with century, as decimal number.  
“%%” = Percent sign.  
Factory option flags. Add values to combine options.  
1024 = enable software-controlled maintenance  
mode  
2048 = enable Internet option 3  
0
0–65535  
FACTORY_OPT  
4096 = enable switch-controlled maintenance mode  
1
2
3
Dasibi emulation version only.  
Experimental.  
iChip option.  
05745 Rev C  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Software Version C.0  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Software Version C.0  
Table A-2: M703E Warning Messages, Software Version C.0  
NAME 1  
WSYSRES  
MESSAGE TEXT  
SYSTEM RESET  
DESCRIPTION  
Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU was reset.  
Data storage was erased.  
WDATAINIT  
WCONFIGINIT  
DATA INITIALIZED  
CONFIG INITIALIZED  
Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or  
erased.  
WPHOTOLTEMP  
WO3GENTEMP  
WPHOTOREF  
WLAMPSTABIL  
WO3GENREF  
WO3PUMP  
PHOTO LAMP TEMP  
WARNING  
Photometer lamp temperature outside of warning limits specified  
by PHOTO_LAMP variable.  
O3 GEN LAMP TEMP  
WARNING  
O3 generator lamp temperature outside of warning limits  
specified by O3_GEN_LAMP variable.  
PHOTO REFERENCE  
WARNING  
Photometer reference reading less than 2500 mV or greater than  
4999 mV.  
PHOTO LAMP STABILITY  
WARNING  
Photometer lamp reference step changes occur more than 25%  
of the time.  
O3 GEN REFERENCE  
WARNING  
O3 reference detector drops below 50 mV during reference  
feedback O3 generator control.  
O3 PUMP WARNING  
O3 pump failed to turn on within timeout period specified by  
O3_PUMP_TIMEOUT variable.  
WBOXTEMP  
BOX TEMP WARNING  
Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by  
BOX_SET variable.  
WREARBOARD  
WRELAYBOARD  
WLAMPDRIVER  
REAR BOARD NOT DET  
RELAY BOARD WARN  
LAMP DRIVER WARN  
Rear board was not detected during power up.  
Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.  
Firmware is unable to communicate with either the O3 generator  
or photometer lamp I2C driver chip.  
WFRONTPANEL  
WANALOGCAL  
FRONT PANEL WARN  
Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel.  
The A/D or at least one D/A channel has not been calibrated.  
ANALOG CAL WARNING  
1
The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.  
A-16  
05745 Rev C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Software Version C.0  
Table A-3: M703E Test Functions, Software Version C.0  
TEST FUNCTION NAME 1  
ACTCONC  
MESSAGE TEXT  
ACT=GENERATE 37 PPB O3  
DESCRIPTION  
Actual concentration being generated, computed from real-  
time inputs.  
TARGCONC  
OUTPUTFLOW  
REGPRESS  
BOXTEMP  
TARG=GENERATE 100 PPB O3 Target concentration to generate.  
OUTPUT FLOW=7.3 LPM  
REG PRESSURE=20.1 PSIG  
BOX TEMP=31.2 C  
Output flow rate (computed from regulator pressure).  
Regulator pressure.  
Internal chassis temperature.  
O3GENREF  
O3GENDRIVE  
O3GENTEMP  
PHOTOMEAS  
PHOTOREF  
O3 GEN REF=1000.0 MV  
O3 GEN DRIVE=800.0 MV  
O3 LAMP TEMP=49.7 C  
PHOTO MEASURE=2998.8 MV  
O3 generator reference detector reading.  
O3 generator lamp drive output.  
O3 generator lamp temperature.  
Photometer detector measure reading.  
Photometer detector reference reading.  
PHOTO REFERENCE=3000.0  
MV  
PHOTOFLOW  
PHOTOLTEMP  
PHOTOSPRESS  
PHOTOSTEMP  
PHOTOSLOPE  
PHOTO FLOW=0.2978 LPM  
PHOTO LAMP TEMP=52.6 C  
PHOTO SPRESS=29.9 IN-HG-A  
PHOTO STEMP=31.8 C  
Photometer sample flow rate.  
Photometer lamp temperature.  
Photometer sample pressure.  
Photometer sample temperature.  
PHOTO SLOPE=1.000  
Photometer slope computed during zero/span bench  
calibration.  
PHOTOOFFSET  
PHOTOSTABIL 2  
TESTCHAN  
PHOTO OFFSET=0.0 PPB  
PHOTO STABIL=0.1 PPB  
TEST=2753.9 MV  
Photometer offset computed during zero/span bench  
calibration.  
Photometer concentration stability (standard deviation of 25  
bench concentration samples taken 10 seconds apart).  
Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output, selected  
with TEST_CHAN_ID variable.  
CLOCKTIME  
TIME=14:48:01  
Current instrument time of day clock.  
1
The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.  
O3 photometer stability measurement option.  
2
05745 Rev C  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Software Version C.0  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
USER NOTES:  
A-18  
05745 Rev C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0  
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0  
Table A-4: M703E Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0  
M703E I/O Signal List for Latest Revision  
Bit or  
Description  
Signal Name  
Channel  
Number  
U11, J1004, control inputs, pins 1-6 = bits 0-5, read, default I/O address 321 hex  
CONTROL_IN_1 –  
CONTROL_IN_6  
0–5  
0 = input asserted  
1 = de-asserted  
Always 1  
6–7  
U14, J1006, control inputs, pins 1-6 = bits 0-5, read, default I/O address 325 hex  
CONTROL_IN_7 –  
CONTROL_IN_12  
0–5  
0 = input asserted  
1 = de-asserted  
Always 1  
6–7  
U17, J1008, control outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 321 hex  
CONTROL_OUT_1 –  
CONTROL_OUT_8  
0–7  
0 = output asserted  
1 = de-asserted  
U21, J1008, control outputs, pins 9-12 = bits 0-3, write, default I/O address 325 hex  
CONTROL_OUT_9 –  
CONTROL_OUT_12  
0–3  
0 = output asserted  
1 = de-asserted  
U7, J108, internal inputs, pins 9-16 = bits 0-7, read, default I/O address 322 hex  
0–7 Spare  
U8, J108, internal outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 322 hex  
0–7 Spare  
U24, J1017, A status outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 323 hex  
ST_SYSTEM_OK  
0
0 = system OK  
1 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode  
Spare  
1
2
ST_CAL_ACTIVE  
0 = executing sequence  
1 = not executing sequence  
ST_DIAG_MODE  
3
4
0 = in diagnostic mode  
1 = not in diagnostic mode  
ST_TEMP_ALARM  
0 = any temperature alarm  
1 = all temperatures OK  
0 = any pressure alarm  
1 = all pressures OK  
Spare  
ST_PRESS_ALARM  
5
6-7  
U27, J1018, B status outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 324 hex  
0-7 Spare  
Relay board digital output (PCF8575), write, default I2C address 44 hex  
RELAY_WATCHDOG  
ZERO_AIR_PUMP  
0
1
Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep relay board active  
0 = pump on for zero air  
1 = off  
Spare  
2–5  
05745 Rev C  
A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
M703E I/O Signal List for Latest Revision  
Bit or  
Description  
Signal Name  
Channel  
Number  
PHOTO_REF_VALVE  
ZA_SHUTOFF_VALVE  
6
0 = photometer valve in reference position  
1 = measure position  
7
0 = open zero air shutoff valve  
1 = close  
O3_PUMP_ON  
8
0 = pump on for photometer to measure O3  
1 = off  
9–13  
14  
Spare  
PHOTO_LAMP_HEATER  
O3_GEN_HEATER  
0 = O3 photometer lamp heater on  
1 = off  
15  
0 = O3 generator lamp heater on  
1 = off  
Front panel I2C keyboard, default I2C address 4E hex  
MAINT_MODE  
LANG2_SELECT  
SEQUENCE_LED  
AUTO_TIMER_LED  
FAULT_LED  
5 (input)  
0 = maintenance mode  
1 = normal mode  
6 (input)  
0 = select second language  
1 = select first language (English)  
8 (output)  
9 (output)  
0 = sequence LED on (executing sequence)  
1 = off  
0 = automatic timer LED on (automatic sequence timer enabled)  
1 = off  
10 (output) 0 = fault LED on  
1 = off  
AUDIBLE_BEEPER  
14 (output) 0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only)  
1 = off  
Rear board primary MUX analog inputs  
PHOTO_DET  
0
1
Photometer detector reading  
O3 generator reference detector reading  
Spare  
O3_GEN_REF_DET  
2
PHOTO_SAMP_PRES  
3
Photometer sample pressure  
Temperature MUX  
Regulator pressure  
Photometer flow  
4
REGULATOR_PRESS  
PHOTO_FLOW  
5
6
7–8  
9
Spare  
REF_4096_MV  
4.096V reference from MAX6241  
Spare  
10-11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
OUTPUT_FLOW  
Output flow  
Spare  
DAC loopback MUX  
Ground reference  
REF_GND  
Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs  
Internal box temperature  
BOX_TEMP  
0
1
PHOTO_SAMP_TEMP  
Photometer sample temperature  
A-20  
05745 Rev C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0  
M703E I/O Signal List for Latest Revision  
Signal Name  
Bit or  
Description  
Channel  
Number  
PHOTO_LAMP_TEMP  
O3_GEN_TEMP  
2
3
Photometer lamp temperature  
O3 generator lamp temperature  
Spare  
4–7  
Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs  
DAC channel 0 loopback  
DAC channel 1 loopback  
DAC channel 2 loopback  
DAC channel 3 loopback  
Rear board analog outputs  
Concentration output #1  
Concentration output #2  
Spare  
DAC_CHAN_1  
DAC_CHAN_2  
DAC_CHAN_3  
DAC_CHAN_4  
0
1
2
3
CONC_OUT_1  
CONC_OUT_2  
0
1
2
3
TEST_OUTPUT  
PHOTO_LAMP_DRIVE  
O3_GEN_DRIVE  
Test measurement output  
I2C analog output (AD5321), default I2C address 18 hex  
O3 photometer lamp drive (0–5V)  
I2C analog output (AD5321), default I2C address 1A hex  
O3 generator lamp drive (0–5V)  
0
0
05745 Rev C  
A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
APPENDIX A-5: Terminal Command Designators, Software Version C.0  
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX A-5: Terminal Command Designators, Software Version C.0  
Table A-5: Terminal Command Designators, Software Version C.0  
COMMAND  
? [ID]  
ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX  
DESCRIPTION  
Display help screen and commands list  
Establish connection to instrument  
Terminate connection to instrument  
Display test(s)  
LOGON [ID]  
LOGOFF [ID]  
password  
SET ALL|name|hexmask  
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]  
Print test(s) to screen  
T [ID]  
name  
Print single test  
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask  
Disable test(s)  
SET ALL|name|hexmask  
Display warning(s)  
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]  
Print warning(s)  
W [ID]  
name  
Clear single warning  
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask  
Clear warning(s)  
ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2]  
Enter calibration mode  
Execute automatic sequence  
Compute new slope/offset  
Exit calibration mode  
ASEQ number  
C [ID]  
COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN  
EXIT  
ABORT  
Abort calibration sequence  
Print all I/O signals  
LIST  
name[=value]  
Examine or set I/O signal  
Print names of all diagnostic tests  
Execute diagnostic test  
Exit diagnostic test  
LIST NAMES  
D [ID]  
ENTER name  
EXIT  
RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode]  
Reset instrument  
LIST  
Print setup variables  
name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]]  
Modify variable  
name="value"  
CONFIG  
Modify enumerated variable  
Print instrument configuration  
Enter/exit maintenance mode  
Print current instrument mode  
V [ID]  
MAINT ON|OFF  
MODE  
The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in [brackets] are optional  
designators. The following key assignments also apply.  
Table A-6: Terminal Key Assignments, Software Version C.0  
TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS  
ESC  
Abort line  
CR (ENTER)  
Ctrl-C  
Execute command  
Switch to computer mode  
COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS  
LF (line feed)  
Ctrl-T  
Execute command  
Switch to terminal mode  
A-22  
05745 Rev C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX B: Spare Parts List  
APPENDIX B: Spare Parts List  
NOTE  
Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by API may result in non-compliance with European  
standard EN 61010-1.  
05834 - LIST, SPARE PARTS, M703E  
05863 - LIST, RECOMMENDED SPARES STOCKING LEVELS, M703E  
05746 Rev B  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
APPENDIX B: Spare Parts List  
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK  
B-2  
05746 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spare Parts List  
M703E  
Part Number  
000940100  
Description  
CD, ORIFICE, .003 GREEN  
006120100  
022710000  
040010000  
040030700  
040300110  
040300210  
041200000  
041200200  
041440000  
042010000  
042580000  
042900100  
045230100  
046740000  
049290000  
050700500  
052400000  
052910100  
055220000  
055730000  
056420000  
056430000  
057360000  
057430000  
057660000  
057670000  
058021400  
058110000  
058330000  
058330100  
062870000  
063720100  
064130000  
CN0000073  
CP0000026  
DS0000025  
FL0000001  
FL0000003  
FL0000020  
FM0000004  
FM0000005  
FM0000006  
HW0000005  
HW0000020  
ASSY, OZONE GEN LAMP (BIR) (OP5)  
ABSORPTION TUBE, QUARTZ, M400A/E (KB)  
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES  
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), 700E PHOTO OPT  
ASSY, CONFIG PLUG, 100-115V, M400E/M703E  
ASSY, CONFIG PLUG, 220-240V, M400E/M703E  
PCA, DET PREAMP w/OP20, M400E/M700E/M703  
PCA, DET PREAMP w/OP20 M700E/ M400E/M703  
PCA, DC HTR/TEMP, BENCH, M400E/M70XE  
ASSY, SAMPLE THERMISTOR, M400E  
PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT  
PROGRAMMED FLASH, E SERIES  
PCA, RELAY CARD, E SERIES  
ASSY, PUMP, 12VDC, M460M/M700E/M465L  
CLIP, THERMISTOR HOLDER  
KIT, RELAY BD M703E CONFIGURATION  
ASSY, BENCH UV LAMP, (BIR), CR *  
ASSY, OPTICAL BENCH, M400E/M703E  
ASSY, VALVE W/CONN, VA 59  
ASSY, REGULATOR, FILTERS, 20LPM M703E  
ASSY, FLOW CNTRL,5LPM, DILUTION, M703E  
ASSY, FLOW CONTROL, PHOTO REF, M703E  
ASSY, 3/8" VENT ADAPTER, M700E  
MANUAL, OPERATORS, M703E  
ASSY, DFU FILTER, M703E  
ASSY, CARBON SCRUBBER, M703E  
PCA, E-SERIES MTHRBRD, M700E, GEN 5-I  
ASSY, EXPENDABLES AKIT, M703E*  
ASSY, INT PUMP, 115V, M703E  
ASSY, INT PUMP, 230V, M703E  
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB)  
DOM, w/SOFTWARE, M703E *  
ASSY, DC HEATER/THERM PCA, O3 GEN  
POWER ENTRY, 120/60 (KB)  
CPU MOD, AR-B1320, PC/104, 38 (KB)  
DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB)  
FILTER, SS  
FILTER, DFU (KB)  
CARBON FILTER, DAU, 000 GRADE *(KB)  
FLOWMETER (KB)  
FLOW RESTRICTOR, 5000-1/4-10000CCM  
FLOW RESTRICTOR, 5000-1/4-5000CCM  
FOOT  
SPRING  
05834J - M703E Spare Parts List (DCN 5480)  
Page 1 of 2  
07/15/09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spare Parts List  
M703E  
Part Number  
HW0000380  
Description  
HANDLE, CARRYING, 9.25", BLK *  
HW0000453  
KIT000253  
KIT000254  
KIT000289  
KIT000290  
OP0000014  
OP0000031  
OR0000001  
OR0000016  
OR0000026  
OR0000034  
OR0000039  
OR0000048  
OR0000077  
OR0000089  
RL0000015  
SW0000051  
SW0000059  
SW0000060  
VA0000014  
VA0000060  
WR0000008  
SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP  
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37, E SERIES  
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38, E SERIES  
KIT, UV LAMP P/S PCA, 041660100  
KIT, UV LAMP P/S PCA, 041660500  
QUARTZ DISC, .75 DIA X 1/16", M400A (KB)  
WINDOW, QUARTZ, 1/2"DIA, .063" THICK (KB  
ORING, 2-006VT *  
ORING, 2-120V  
ORING, 2-110 S604-70  
ORING, 2-011V FT10  
ORING, 2-012V  
ORING, 2-112S  
ORING, 2-018V  
ORING, 2-016V  
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)  
SWITCH, POWER CIRC BREAK VDE/CE, w/RG(KB  
PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN  
PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-100 PSIG, ALL SEN700e  
REGULATOR  
CHECK VALVE, B, 1/4" TUBE FITTINGS  
POWER CORD, 10A  
05834J - M703E Spare Parts List (DCN 5480)  
Page 2 of 2  
07/15/09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels  
M703E  
Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: Standard  
Units  
6-10  
Part Number  
Description  
1
2-5  
11-20 21-30  
006120100  
022710000  
058330000  
058330100  
040010000  
040030700  
041200000  
041200200  
041440000  
041660100  
041660500  
062870000  
042010000  
042580000  
045230100  
046740000  
052400000  
056420000  
056430000  
058021400  
ASSY, OZONE GEN LAMP  
1
2
2
4
4
8
1
1
8
8
2
2
8
2
2
2
8
2
4
1
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
ABSORPTION TUBE, QUARTZ  
ASSY, INT PUMP, 115V/60Hz  
ASSY, INT PUMP, 230V/50Hz  
ASSY, FAN, REAR PANEL  
PCA, PRESS SENSORS PHOTO OPT  
PCA, DET. PREAMP w/OP20, BENCH  
PCA, DET. PREAMP w/OP20, O3 GEN  
PCA, DC HEATER/TEMP SENSOR  
PCA, UV POWER SUPPLY, O3 GEN,  
PCA, UV POWER SUPPLY, OPT BENCH  
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB)  
THERMISTOR ASSEMBLY  
KEYBOARD  
PCA, RELAY CARD  
ASSY, PUMP, 12 VDC  
ASSY, UV LAMP BENCH  
ASSY, FLOW CONTROL, DILUTION  
ASSY, FLOW CONTROL, PHOTO REF  
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBOARD, GEN 5-I  
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
4
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
DS0000025 DISPLAY  
KIT000253  
KIT000254  
KIT, SPARE, PS37, PWR SUPPLY,+5V,+15V,-15V  
KIT, SPARE, PS38, POWER SUPPLY, 12V  
05863D - M703E RSSL (DCN 5480)  
Printed documents are UNCONTROLLED  
07/15/09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model M703E  
Calibrator  
Operator’s  
Manual  
Warranty/Repair  
Questionnaire  
Model 703E  
CUSTOMER:_______________________________  
CONTACT NAME: __________________________  
PHONE: _____________________________________  
FAX NO. _____________________________________  
SITE ADDRESS:____________________________________________________________________________  
MODEL TYPE: ______________ SERIAL NO.:_________________ FIRMWARE REVISION:_____________  
Are there any failure messages? _______________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
________________________________________________________________________ (Continue on back if necessary)  
PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE:  
PARAMETER  
RECORDED VALUE  
ACCEPTABLE VALUE  
1% OF TARG  
50 – 1000 PPB  
2 – 5 LPM  
ACT  
PPB  
TARG  
PPB  
LPM  
PSIG  
ºC  
OUTPUT FLOW  
REG PRESSURE  
BOX TEMP  
15 ± 2 PSIG @ 5 LPM  
20 – 35 ºC  
0 – 5000 mV  
0 – 5000mV  
O3 GEN REF  
mV  
O3 GEN DRIVE  
O3 LAMP TEMP  
PHOTO MEASURE  
PHOTO REFERENCE  
PHOTO FLOW  
PHOTO LAMP TEMP  
PHOTO SPRESS  
PHOTO STEMP  
PHOTO SLOPE  
PHOTO OFFSET  
mV  
48 ± 1 ºC  
ºC  
2500 – 4700 mV  
2500 – 4700 mV  
0.720 – 0.880 LPM  
58 ± 1 ºC  
mV  
mV  
LPM  
ºC  
-1” AMBIENT IN-HG-A  
25 – 48ºC  
IN-HG-A  
ºC  
1 ± 0.15  
0 ± 10 PPB  
PPB  
Depending on options installed, not all test parameters shown below will be available in your calibrator)  
1
If ozone generator option installed.  
2
If photometer option installed.  
3
if permeation tube installed.  
What is measured photometer flow rate ____________________________________________________ cc3/min  
What is measured O3 generator flow rate? _________________________________________________ cc3/min  
What is the photo reference value while generating SPAN: __________________ ZERO:__________________  
TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE  
PHONE: (858) 657-9800  
TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190  
FAX: (858) 657-9816  
05747 Rev B  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model M703E  
Calibrator  
Operator’s  
Manual  
Warranty/Repair  
Questionnaire  
Model 703E  
What are the failure symptoms? ________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
What tests have you done trying to solve the problem? ______________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
Thank you for providing this information. Your assistance enables Teledyne Instruments to respond faster to the  
problem that you are encountering.  
OTHER NOTES: ____________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________________  
_______________________________________________________________________________  
_______________________________________________________________________________  
_______________________________________________________________________________  
_______________________________________________________________________________  
_______________________________________________________________________________  
_______________________________________________________________________________  
_______________________________________________________________________________  
_______________________________________________________________________________  
_______________________________________________________________________________  
TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE  
PHONE: (858) 657-9800  
TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190  
FAX: (858) 657-9816  
C-2  
05747 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics  
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics  
Table D-1: List of Included Diagrams and Schematics  
Document #  
Document Title  
05826  
Interconnect Drawing M703E  
Interconnect List M703E  
05827  
04420  
04422  
04421  
04259  
04354  
04395  
04524  
05703  
SCH, PCA 04120, UV DETECTOR, M400E  
SCH, PCA 04144, DC HEATER/TEMP SENSOR  
SCH, PCA 04166, UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY, M400E  
SCH, PCA 04258, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES  
SCH, PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface  
SCH, PCA 04394, INTRFC,ETHERNET,E-SERIES  
SCH, PCA 04523, RELAY CARD, M100E/M200E/M400E  
SCH, PCA 05702, MTHERBRD, E-SER, GEN-4  
05748 Rev B  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics  
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK  
D-2  
05748 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics  
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics  
Table D-1: List of Included Diagrams and Schematics  
Document #  
Document Title  
05826  
Interconnect Drawing M703E  
Interconnect List M703E  
05827  
04420  
04422  
04421  
04259  
04354  
04395  
04524  
05703  
SCH, PCA 04120, UV DETECTOR, M400E  
SCH, PCA 04144, DC HEATER/TEMP SENSOR  
SCH, PCA 04166, UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY, M400E  
SCH, PCA 04258, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES  
SCH, PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface  
SCH, PCA 04394, INTRFC,ETHERNET,E-SERIES  
SCH, PCA 04523, RELAY CARD, M100E/M200E/M400E  
SCH, PCA 05702, MTHERBRD, E-SER, GEN-4  
05748 Rev B  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEDYNE API  
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics  
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual  
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK  
D-2  
05748 Rev B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
R1  
SEE TABLE  
C1  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
100pf  
-15V  
R6  
1.0K  
C4  
0.1uf  
VR1  
5K  
PHOTOCELL  
D1  
R4  
5K  
TP1  
-15V  
TEST_PLUG  
U1  
R5  
100  
R2  
2
3
J1  
R3  
1.0K  
6
PHOTO_OUT  
1.0K  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OPA124  
C3  
1.0uF  
+
C7  
N.P.  
+15V  
-15V  
VCC  
+15V  
C5  
0.1uf  
C2  
1.0uf  
MICROFIT  
+
+15V  
U2  
VCC  
+15V  
VR2  
LT1460S3-2.5  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
GND GND  
VCC GND  
REF+ F0  
REF- SCK  
IN+  
IN-  
1
2
REF_2.5V  
PHOTO_OUT  
IN OUT  
C6  
0.1uf  
SDO  
CS  
GND GND  
GND GND  
VCC  
LTC2413  
C8  
0.1  
PCA VERSION TABLE  
PCA#  
R1  
4.99M  
2.0M  
04120-0000  
04120-0200  
PCA, UV DETECTOR PREAMP  
The information herein is the  
property of API and is  
APPROVALS  
DRAWN  
DATE  
submitted in strictest con-  
fidence for reference only.  
Unauthorized use by anyone  
for any other purposes is  
prohibited. This document or  
any information contained  
in it may not be duplicated  
without proper authorization.  
USA  
CHECKED  
SIZE DRAWING NO.  
REVISION  
A
04420  
B
APPROVED  
LAST MOD.  
3-Aug-2004  
SHEET  
1
1
of  
1
2
3
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
R1  
J1  
30R, 50W  
1
2
3
4
5
6
TH1  
HEADER 6  
THERMISTOR  
Rev  
A
Date  
8/1/02  
Change Description  
Eng  
KL  
Initial release for PCA schematic  
SCH, DC HEATER/THERMISTOR  
The information herein is the  
property of API and is  
APPROVALS  
DRAWN  
DATE  
submitted in strictest con-  
fidence for reference only.  
Unauthorized use by anyone  
for any other purposes is  
prohibited. This document or  
any information contained  
in it may not be duplicated  
without proper authorization.  
CHECKED  
SIZE DRAWING NO.  
REVISION  
B
04422  
A
APPROVED  
LAST MOD.  
SHEET  
1-Aug-2002  
1
1
of  
1
2
3
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
P2  
LAMP OUTPUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
T1  
PE-6196  
TP2  
TEST_PLUG  
R5  
TIP126  
Q1  
P1  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
4.7K, 2W  
+15V  
1
2
3
4
C4  
.01  
D3  
D4  
R4  
100  
RP2D  
4.7K  
TP4  
TEST_PLUG  
C3  
220  
C2  
0.1  
+
1N4148  
D6  
1N4148  
D5  
HEADER 4  
D1  
1N4148  
IRF520  
Q2  
IRF520  
Q3  
1N4148  
1N4148  
R2  
R3  
D2  
1N4148  
5.1K  
5.1K  
R6  
330  
VCC  
VCC  
RP2C  
4.7K  
R7  
3.9K  
U3  
Vdd GND  
C6  
.033  
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
A0  
A1  
Vout  
SDA  
SCL  
PD  
TP1  
TEST_PLUG  
+15V  
JP1  
JUMPER2  
U1B  
LM358  
RP2A  
4.7K  
AD5321-RM8  
1
2
6
5
R14  
10  
7
+15V  
RP2B  
4.7K  
3
4
C5  
.01  
3
16  
2
VREF  
SYNC  
VREF  
+15V  
R12  
22  
11  
14  
8
OUTPUT A  
NONINV. INPUT  
CT  
R13  
22  
5
R1  
2.21K  
OUPUT B  
TP3  
TEST_PLUG  
R15  
150  
7
SOFT START  
INV. INPUT  
SHUTDOWN  
OSC. OUTPUT  
DISCHARGE  
RT  
VR2  
+15V  
1
6
VCC  
3
2
C9  
0.1  
C11  
.0047  
C12  
0.1  
10  
4
12  
9
R16  
3.9K  
1
GROUND  
COMP  
+15V  
C7  
1.0UF  
U1A  
2
3
C8  
0.1  
1
U2  
SG3525  
LM4040CIM3  
LM358  
+15V  
C13  
0.1  
C1  
470  
+
C10  
0.1  
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING PCA'S:  
CHANGE NOTES  
PCA#  
04166-0000  
NOTE  
M400E BENCH AND IZS LAMP SUPPLY  
SHUNT INSTALLED IN J1 FOR BENCH SUPPLY  
SHUNT NOT INSTALLED IN J1 FOR IZS SUPPLY  
SCH, UV LAMP DRIVER, M450  
REV. DATE  
8/1/02  
CHANGE DESCRIPTION  
INITIAL  
KL  
The information herein is the  
property of API and is  
APPROVALS  
DATE  
A
INITIAL RELEASE  
submitted in strictest con-  
fidence for reference only.  
Unauthorized use by anyone  
for any other purposes is  
prohibited. This document or  
any information contained  
in it may not be duplicated  
without proper authorization.  
DRAWN  
KL  
3/4/97  
CHECKED  
SIZE DRAWING NO.  
REVISION  
B
04421  
A
APPROVED  
LAST MOD.  
1-Aug-2002  
SHEET  
1
1
of  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCC  
M1  
M2  
VCC  
U1  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
D_A  
D_B  
D_C  
D_D  
D_E  
S8  
S7  
DS1  
DS2  
DS3  
RN3  
220  
M3  
M4  
M5  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GRN  
YEL  
RED  
Y1  
Y2  
Y3  
Y4  
Y5  
OSC  
1
2
3
4
5
10  
9
MAINT_LED_V+  
8
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
VCC  
7
6
M6  
13  
AVL  
C1  
KBM  
12  
11  
9
KEYBOARD, LED & HORN  
U2  
S6  
X1  
X2  
X3  
X4  
.1uF  
C6  
+
14  
OE  
10uF  
DS4  
8
KBD_A0 21  
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
A0  
A1  
A2  
INT  
P00  
P01  
P02  
P03  
P04  
P05  
P06  
P07  
P10  
P11  
P12  
P13  
P14  
P15  
P16  
P17  
M7  
KBD_A1  
KBD_A2  
2
3
1
S5  
S4  
+
DS5  
74C923  
SCL  
SDA  
22  
23  
MAINT_SW  
LANG_SELCT  
SCL  
SDA  
DS6  
M9  
M8  
GRN LED  
YEL LED  
RED LED  
LED 4  
LED 5  
LED 6  
S3  
PCF8575  
RI-1000 ONLY  
Layout Instructions:  
M10  
VCC  
MF3  
A1  
VCC  
S2  
S1  
1. Minimum trace width 8 mil would like to have  
10 mil traces if possible.  
R2  
1.0K  
U3A  
HORN  
SPR_I/O_0  
SONALERT  
4
3
2
1
PRE  
CLK  
D
2. Please run traces on both and backside but  
where possible fill one side with GND.  
3. Minimum width for +5_DISP, DISP_PWR,  
DISP_RET is 40 mil, except to test points.  
4. Minimum width for VCC, GND, Vdd, Vss is  
30 mil, except to test points  
5
6
Q
Q
RN1  
4.7K  
MF4  
CLR  
C7  
MM74HC74A  
300pF  
VCC  
S9  
RI-1000 ONLY  
U4  
VCC  
J3 TO/FRM DISPLAY  
OPT. MAINT SWITCH  
S12  
DISP_DA_A0  
DISP_DA_A1  
DISP_DA_A2  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AO  
A1  
A2  
P0  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
P6  
P7  
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
1
3
5
7
9
11  
13  
15  
U3B  
10  
11  
12  
13  
PRE  
CLK  
D
9
8
KYBRD_INT  
VCC  
Q
Q
J4  
SCL  
SDA  
14  
15  
9
DISP_WR  
DISP_BUSY  
T8201  
SCL  
SDA  
RN5  
4.7K  
MAINT SW  
MAINT_SW  
10  
11  
12  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
CLR  
MAINT SW RET  
MAINT LED V+  
MAINT LED  
LANG SW  
LANG SW RET  
SPR I/O_0  
SPR I/O RET  
SPR I/O_1  
SPR I/O RET  
SPR I/O_2  
MAINT_LED_V+  
MAINT_LED  
LANG_SELCT  
MM74HC74A  
PCF8574  
DISPLAY DATA  
KBD_A0  
KBD_A1  
KBD_A2  
13  
INT  
SPR_I/O_0  
SPR_I/O_1  
SPR_I/O_2  
DISP_DA_A0  
DISP_DA_A1  
DISP_DA_A2  
JP2 I2C TERMINATION  
DISP_CN_A0  
DISP_CN_A1  
DISP_CN_A2  
SCL  
SDA  
DISP_PWR  
1
3
2
4
DISP_RET  
+5_DISP  
DISP_PWR_EN must  
be high for display to  
be powered.  
VCC  
Q1  
SPR I/O RET  
DEFAULT ADDRESS SELECTS FOR I2C TO PARALLEL  
DECODERS:  
+5_DISP  
C17  
OPT. LANG. SWITCH  
S13  
JP1  
VCC  
1
2
3
6
5
4
RN2  
4.7K  
D
ADRS SLCTS  
KEYBOARD (KBD_A0 - A2)  
1 1 1  
1500uF  
G
S
DISPLAY CONTROL  
U5  
3M-2514-6002UB  
SI3443DV  
DISPL CONTROL (DISP_CN_A0 -A1)  
0 1 1  
JP5  
DISP_CN_A0  
DISP_CN_A1  
DISP_CN_A2  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DISP_WR  
DISP_BUSY  
DISP_PWR_EN  
MAINT_LED  
GND  
VCC  
+5_DISP  
BUSY  
SDA  
TP4  
KYBRD INT  
TP5  
AO  
A1  
A2  
P0  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
P6  
P7  
DISP_PWR_OVR  
TP1  
TP2  
TP3  
1
2
NOTES:  
SDA  
SCL  
KYBRD_INT  
VCC  
+5_DISP  
MCP120T  
Vdd RST  
1. This schematic is based on  
the PWB PN, 03974 and  
applies to PCA PN, 03975  
SCL  
SDA  
14  
15  
9
SCL  
SDA  
1
3
MMBT3904  
DISP_PWR  
DISP_RET  
TP7  
SCL  
10  
11  
12  
R3  
Q2  
U6  
TP6  
TP8  
TP9  
R20  
1K  
R4  
4.7K  
DISP_BUSY  
DISP_PWR  
DISP_RET  
4.7K  
13  
INT  
+5_DISP  
4.85V DTCT  
VCC  
(U1)  
(U2)  
(U4)  
(U45  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCL  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCL  
DISP_RET  
SPR_I/O_1  
SPR_I/O_2  
PCF8574  
+5_DISP  
+5_DISP  
VCC  
KYBRD_INT  
KYBRD_INT  
C11  
220pF  
C12  
C10  
C14  
C4  
C9  
C8  
C13  
C2  
.1uF  
C3  
C5  
C15  
.1uF  
C16  
+
+
VCC  
DISP_RET  
JP3  
DISP_RET  
220pF  
220pF  
100uF  
.1uF  
220pF  
220pF  
10uF  
.1uF  
.1uF  
.1uF  
SDA  
10  
SDA  
10  
Title  
J1  
J2  
JP4  
Schematic for PCA #04258 and PCB #04257, Keyboard/Display Interface for E series  
DISP_RET  
Size  
B
Number  
Revision  
a
04259  
Date:  
File:  
21-Mar-2002  
Sheet of  
N:\YHWork\M300B\keyboard\04257a\04259A.ddDb rawn By:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
+15V  
R2  
1.1K  
S1  
D
C
B
A
VR2  
D
C
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR  
2
3
C2  
1.0UF  
1
LM4040CIZ  
TP4 TP5  
S1/S4_OUT S2_OUT  
TP3  
S3_OUT  
TP2  
10V_REF  
TP1  
GND  
+15V  
J1  
3
2
1
6
5
4
S2  
1
2
3
4
5
6
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR  
MINIFIT6  
+15V  
R1  
499  
S3  
VR1  
1
2
3
FLOW SENSOR  
FM_4  
2
3
C1  
1.0UF  
CN_647 X 3  
1
+15V  
LM4040CIZ  
S4  
C3  
1.0  
1
2
3
4
CON4  
SCH, PCA 04003, PRESS/FLOW, 'E' SERIES  
The information herein is the  
property of API and is  
APPROVALS  
DATE  
submitted in strictest con-  
fidence for reference only.  
Unauthorized use by anyone  
for any other purposes is  
prohibited. This document or  
any information contained  
in it may not be duplicated  
without proper authorization.  
DRAWN  
A
CHECKED  
APPROVED  
SIZE DRAWING NO.  
REVISION  
B
04354  
D
LAST MOD.  
3-Dec-2007  
SHEET  
1
1
of  
1
2
3
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
B
C
D
+5V  
+5V  
IC102:A  
74AC00D  
IC102:D  
74AC00D  
Y102  
C107  
15pF  
+5V  
IC103:A  
74ACT32  
C106  
15pF  
+5V  
+5V  
1
2
+5V  
+5V  
C101  
100nF  
C102  
100nF  
+5V  
+5V  
1
2
12  
13  
3
IC101  
IC105  
S
S
3
6
11  
C118  
100nF  
9
7
9
8
2
2
5
6
6
9
8
5
9
0
9
5
IC103:D  
74ACT32  
R110  
4K99  
74ACT138  
CS8900A-CQ  
9
S
20.0 MHz  
16  
VCC  
13  
12  
R111  
4K99  
A15  
A16  
A17  
1
2
3
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
33  
77  
76  
X
X
D
V
D
D
1
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
B
C
Y0  
Y1  
Y2  
Y3  
Y4  
Y5  
Y6  
Y7  
11  
IOCS16  
MEMCS16  
SBHE  
REFRESH  
AEN  
IOCHRDY  
SLEEP  
TEST  
IC102:B  
74AC00D  
34  
36  
49  
63  
64  
T
A
L
1
T
A
L
2
V
D
D
2
V
D
D
3
V
D
D
4
V
D
D
2
V
D
D
1
V
D
D
3
+5V  
+5V  
1
1
IC103:B  
74ACT32  
6
4
5
4
+5V  
C103  
100nF  
C128  
100nF  
R112  
499R  
6
4
5
8
DS101  
ACT,  
S
G1  
G2  
G3  
A18  
A19  
5
9
7
61  
62  
29  
28  
100  
99  
78  
93  
92  
IC103:C  
74ACT32  
8
IOR  
IOW  
MEMR  
MEMW  
LANLED  
GND  
IC102:C  
74AC00D  
R113  
499R  
DS102  
LINK  
9
10  
8
2
7
11  
13  
15  
12  
14  
16  
17  
75  
IC104  
ELCS  
LINKLED/ HC0  
BSTATUS/ HC1  
RES  
+5V  
MT1  
MT2  
10  
C104  
22pF  
CHIPSEL  
DMARQ2  
DMARQ1  
DMARQ0  
DMACK2  
DMACK1  
DMACK0  
CSOUT  
RESET  
C0561AD-L  
14  
13  
1
42  
31  
18  
41  
VCC  
X1  
-BHE  
LANDRQ  
ALE  
NC PL101:14  
NC PL101:13  
S
Y101  
18.432MHz  
+5V  
C105  
22pF  
R114  
4K99  
C109  
100nF  
1
15  
43  
44  
+5V PL101:1  
X2  
CLKO  
50 A19  
39 A18  
A17  
45 A16  
49 A15  
47  
60  
59  
58  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
+5V PL101:15  
T101  
TG43-1406N  
A19  
A18  
A17  
A16  
A15  
A14  
A13  
A12  
A11  
A10  
A9  
A8  
A7  
A6  
A5  
A4  
A3  
A2  
A1  
SA19  
SA18  
SA17  
SA16  
SA15  
SA14  
SA13  
SA12  
SA11  
SA10  
SA9  
SA8  
SA7  
SA6  
SA5  
SA4  
SA3  
SA2  
SA1  
52  
68  
8
-WR  
-RD  
2
+5V  
J101 2  
1:1  
1
2
3
16  
6
2
16  
RXD-  
RX-  
14  
21  
GND PL101:2  
-UCS  
-LCS  
51  
48  
53  
56  
54  
38  
37  
33  
46  
36  
35  
34  
19  
57  
(5) GND PL101:16  
R102  
4.99K  
R101 +5V  
4.99K  
R115  
100R  
15  
14  
S
40  
65  
URTINT  
-LMSEL  
12  
91  
88  
3
2
RXD+  
TXD-  
RX+  
TX-  
STATUS PL101:12  
R116  
24R3  
IC106  
MAX237  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
1:  
2
6
7
8
11  
10  
9
9
13  
VCC  
C2+  
C119  
100nF  
R103  
499  
R104  
499  
S
10  
C1+  
S
S
C108  
68pF  
R117  
24R3  
C120  
1uF 16V  
S
S
A0  
SA0  
12  
11  
14  
15  
87  
1
4
5
7
8
9
C1-  
V+  
C2-  
V-  
TXD+  
TX+  
NC1  
NC2  
NC3  
NC4  
S1  
25  
10  
11  
23  
13  
16  
17  
22  
9
24  
2
3
4
5
18  
19  
20  
21  
24  
25  
26  
27  
74  
73  
72  
71  
68  
67  
66  
65  
D15  
D14  
D13  
D12  
D11  
D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
SD15  
SD14  
SD13  
SD12  
SD11  
SD10  
SD09  
SD08  
SD7  
SD6  
SD5  
SD4  
SD3  
27  
28  
29  
32  
66  
NC1  
NC2  
NC3  
NC4  
NC5  
DS103 DS104  
TXD RXD  
C121  
1uF 16V  
S
S
C110  
100nF  
84  
83  
82  
81  
80  
79  
DO-  
DO+  
CI-  
10  
S2  
DB-9 PIN NUMBERS IN PARENS.  
RS-232  
TTL  
3
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
1
24  
20  
7
6
18  
19  
21  
26  
63  
58  
60  
20  
3
TO1  
TO2  
TO3  
TO4  
TO5  
TI1  
TI2  
TI3  
TI4  
TI5  
TXD1  
-DTR1  
-RTS1  
-DCD1  
-RI1  
(2) TXD PL101:3  
(6) DTR PL101:4  
(8) RTS PL101:5  
CI+  
DI-  
DRCI D PPLL110011::67  
(1)  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
8
9
10  
4
23  
16  
5
22  
17  
30  
15  
59  
12  
61  
62  
55  
67  
C111  
100nF  
C112  
100nF  
C113  
100nF  
C114  
100nF  
RI1  
RI2  
RI3  
RO1  
RO2  
RO3  
RXD1  
-DSR1  
-CTS1  
-RES  
HLDA  
HOLD  
GND  
SD2  
SD1  
SD0  
DI+  
(3) RXD PL101:8  
(4) DSR PL101:9  
(7) CTS PL101:10  
6
7
S
S
S
D0  
11  
8
35  
30  
31  
32  
D
V
S
S
1
D
V
S
S
3
3
4
5
6
R106  
4.99K  
+5V  
GND  
INTRQ3  
INTRQ2  
INTRQ1  
INTRQ0  
EECS  
EESK  
RESET PL101:11  
D
V
S
S
1
D
V
S
S
2
D
V
S
S
3
D
V
S
S
4
A
V
S
S
0
A
V
S
S
1
A
V
S
S
2
A
V
S
S
3
A
V
S
S
4
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
EEDATAOUT  
EEDATAIN  
64  
GND  
LANINT  
A
A
+5V  
+5V  
C115  
100nF  
C116  
100nF  
C117  
100nF  
C127  
100nF  
S
S
S
8
1
0
2
3
5
5
5
7
7
0
1
8
9
8
6
9
4
9
6
IC107  
TL7705  
+5V  
+5V  
PL102-1  
R105  
4.99K  
7
8
5
6
4
C129  
10uF 16V  
PL102-2  
R108  
10.0K  
R109  
10.0K  
SENSE  
VCC  
S
2
3
1
RESIN  
CT  
RESET  
RESET  
GND  
TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION  
INSTRUMENTATION INC.  
4
4
NOTES:  
Title  
Size  
REF  
R107  
10.0K  
1
2
3
THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO PWB 04393 REV. A.  
ALL RESISTANCES IN OHMS, 1%  
ETHERNET INTERFACE SCHEMATIC  
C126  
100nF  
C124  
1uF 16V  
C125  
1uF 16V  
S
S
S
Number  
Rev  
PARTS DENOTED "S" ON SECONDARY SIDE OF PCA  
04395  
B
A
Date  
Filename  
Thu Jul 25 2002  
SLAN.S03  
Drawn by  
Sheet  
1
of  
1
A
D
B
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
Name  
04524-p1.sch  
Name  
04524-p2.sch  
Name  
04524-p3.sch  
Title  
M100E/200E/400E RELAY PCA SCHEMATIC  
Size  
B
Number  
04522  
Revision  
D
0
0
Date:  
File:  
16-May-2007  
Sheet of  
N:\PCBMGR\04522cc\source\04522D.drdabwn By:  
6
1
2
3
4
5
Te  
Te  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
General Trace Width Requirements  
1. Vcc (+5V) and I2C VCC should be 15 mil  
2. Digitial grounds should be at least 20 mils  
3. +12V and +12V return should be 30 mils  
4. All AC lines (AC Line, AC Neutral, RELAY0 - 4, All signals on JP2) should be 30 mils wide, with 120 mil  
isolation/creepage distance around them  
5. Traces between J7 - J12 should be top and bottom and at least 140 mils.  
6. Traces to the test points can be as small as 10 mils.  
J1  
AC_Line  
AC_Neutral  
1
2
3
4
4 PIN  
RELAY0  
RELAY1  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
VCC  
RN1  
330  
R1  
R2  
2.2K 2.2K  
RELAY0  
K1  
RELAY1  
K2  
RELAY2  
K3  
JP2  
Heater Config Jumper  
J2 16 PIN  
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
2
4
RELAY2  
COMMON0  
LOAD0  
TS0  
1
2
JP1  
I2C_Vcc  
RELAY0  
I2C_Vcc  
3
3
RELAY0  
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
+-  
+-  
+-  
SLD-RLY  
4
5
TS0  
TS1  
TS2  
COMMON1  
LOAD1  
TS1  
6
SLD-RLY  
SLD-RLY  
7
RELAY1  
RELAY2  
8
HEADER 4X2  
RELAY1  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
COMMON2  
LOAD2  
TS2  
D1  
WDOG  
I2C_Vcc  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D7  
D8  
D9  
D10  
AC_Neutral  
RED  
RELAY2  
U1  
YEL  
RL0  
YEL  
RL1  
YEL  
RL2  
GRN  
VA0  
GRN  
VA1  
GRN  
VA2  
GRN  
VA3  
C1  
0.1  
21  
2
4
A0  
P00  
P01  
P02  
5
A1  
A2  
3
6
+12V  
1
7
INT P03  
P04  
SCL P05  
SDA P06  
P07  
J3  
8
IO3  
IO4  
22  
23  
9
1
U2A  
10  
11  
13  
14  
2
3
4
5
F1  
F2  
1
2
4A PTC INTERRUPTOR  
4A PTC INTERRUPTOR  
P10  
P11  
15 IO10  
16 IO11  
17 IO12  
18 IO13  
19 IO14  
20 IO15  
P12  
CON5  
SN74HC04  
U2B  
P13  
DD4  
6A RECTIFIER  
DD1  
6A RECTIFIER  
P14  
VCC  
P15  
Q1  
VCC  
P16  
3
5
4
P17  
VALVE_POWER  
R3  
J4  
20K  
R5  
10K  
PCF8575  
VCC  
U5  
1
1
16  
15  
14  
10  
9
VALVE0  
2
IN 4  
IN 3  
OUT4  
U2C  
U4  
I2C_Vcc  
2
IRF7205  
JP4  
K
3
3
VALVE1  
ENABLE OUT 3  
4
6
6
IN 2  
IN 1  
OUT 2  
K
OUT 1  
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
7
VALVE2  
6
VBATT  
VOUT  
VCC  
RESET  
RESET'  
WDO'  
8
7
VALVE3  
8
U2D  
U2E  
GND  
CD IN'  
1
2
3
C3  
1
R6  
10K  
UDN2540B(16)  
BATT_ONCD OUT'  
LOW LINE' WDI  
OSC IN  
OSC SEL  
9
8
8 PIN  
VLV_ENAB  
PFO'  
PFI  
WTCDG OVR  
DD2  
+
C16  
+
+
15V TVS  
C5  
C6  
JP3  
R4  
1M  
D17  
DL4148  
C4  
10/16  
2000/25  
MAX693  
11  
10  
+
22 uF  
1 2  
10/16  
C2  
0.001  
find low ESR electroytic  
HEADER 1X2  
+12RET  
TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7  
+12V  
DGND +5V AGND +15V -15V +12RT  
DC PWR IN  
J5  
KEYBRD  
J7  
MTHR BRD  
SYNC DEMOD  
J10  
SPARE  
J11  
REV  
AUTH  
DATE  
J8  
J9  
J12  
J13  
B
CAC  
10/3/02  
CE MARK LINE VOLTAGE TRACE SPACING FIX  
Add alternate thermocouple connectors  
DGND  
VCC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D
RJ  
5/16/07  
AGND  
+15V  
3
3
3
4
4
4
AGND  
-15V  
5
5
5
6
6
6
+12RET  
+12V  
7
7
Title  
7
8
8
Schem, M100E/M200E/M400E Relay PCB  
8
EGND  
CHS_GND  
9
9
9
10  
10  
10  
10  
Size  
B
Number  
04524  
Revision  
10  
D
CON10THROUGH  
CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH  
CON10THROUGH  
CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH  
CON10THROUGH  
Printed documents are uncontrolled  
4
1
3
CON10THROUGH  
Date:  
File:  
16-May-2007  
Sheet of  
N:\PCBMGR\04522cc\source\04522D.drdabwn By:  
6
1
2
3
5
Te  
T
Te  
T
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Aux Relay Connector  
AC_Line  
JP6  
Heater Config Jumper  
J18 16 PIN  
1
COMMON3  
LOAD3  
TS3  
RELAY3  
RELAY4  
2
RELAY3  
3
RN2  
330  
RELAY4  
RELAY3  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
4
5
6
TS3  
TS4  
COMMON4  
LOAD4  
TS4  
7
RELAY4  
8
RELAY3  
K4  
RELAY4  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
K5  
2
1
3
2
4
1
3
AC_Neutral  
I2C_Vcc  
4
I2C_Vcc  
+-  
+-  
JP7  
SLD-RLY  
SLD-RLY  
5
4
3
2
1
10  
9
8
JP7 Configuration  
7
6
D5  
D6  
D11  
D12  
GRN GRN  
D13  
D14  
D15  
D16  
GRN  
Standard Pumps  
60 Hz: 3-8  
50 Hz: 2-7, 5-10  
World Pumps  
PUMP  
J20  
YEL  
YEL  
GRN  
GRN  
GRN  
60Hz/100-115V: 3-8, 4-9, 2-7  
50Hz/100-115V: 3-8, 4-9, 2-7, 5-10  
60Hz/220-240V: 3-8, 1-6  
MINI-FIT 10  
1
2
3
4
VA5  
VA6  
VA7  
50Hz/220-240V: 3-8, 1-6, 5-10  
VA4  
TR0  
TR1  
RL3  
RL4  
AC_Neutral  
AC_Line  
IO3  
IO4  
IO10  
IO11  
IO12  
VCC  
U3A  
VALVE_POWER  
J6  
IO13  
1
2
U6  
1
1
16  
Valve4  
Valve5  
Valve6  
Valve7  
IN 4  
15  
OUT4  
2
2
3
6
7
8
IN 3  
K
3
14  
10  
9
SN74HC04  
U3D  
VLV_ENAB  
ENABLE OUT 3  
4
IN 2  
IN 1  
OUT 2  
K
5
6
OUT 1  
7
9
8
8
9
UDN2540B(16)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
U3B  
U3F  
DD3  
15V TVS  
U3E  
U3C  
C17  
+
IO14  
3
4
11  
5
10  
6
22 uF  
CON14  
VCC  
+12RET  
IO15  
13  
12  
J19  
+12V  
+12V  
1
2
C13  
0.1  
VCC  
MINIFIT-2  
U2F  
Q2  
IRL3303  
13  
12  
J14  
1
2
MINIFIT-2  
Q4  
IRL3303  
Q3  
IRL3303  
Use 50 mil traces  
J21  
Title  
+12V  
1
2
Schem, M100E/M200E/M400E Relay PCB  
+12RET  
MINIFIT-2  
Size  
B
Number  
04524  
Revision  
D
Printed documents are uncontrolled  
1
2
3
Date:  
File:  
16-May-2007  
Sheet of  
N:\PCBMGR\04522cc\source\04522D.drdabwn By:  
6
2
3
4
5
Te  
T
Te  
T
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
+15V  
R23  
C7  
TC1_KCOMPA  
TC1_JCOMPA  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
6.81K  
0.1  
C12  
0.01  
-15V  
ZR3  
4.7V  
TC1_GND  
R21  
1k  
R19  
3M  
THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR  
U7A  
1
OMEGA  
J15  
3
J17  
F4  
1/8 AMP FUSE  
1
2
3
4
R13  
10K  
-
2
2
1
+
TC1_GNDTCA  
R25  
14K  
R7  
20K  
OPA2277  
F3  
1/8 AMP FUSE  
J15A  
C10  
0.1  
MICROFIT-4  
-15V  
ZR1  
3V  
-
R15  
10K  
2
1
TC1_JGAINA  
TC1_JGAINB  
TC1_GND  
ZR2  
3V  
+
0.01  
C8  
+15V  
THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR  
HAMITHERM  
R17  
5K  
1M  
R11  
U8  
TC1_5MVA  
TC1_5MVB  
3
1M  
TOUT  
R10  
TC1_JGAINA  
TC1_5MVA  
TC1_JCOMPA  
TC1_KCOMPA  
TC1_GNDTCA  
TC2_JGAINA  
TC2_5MVA  
TC2_JCOMPA  
TC2_KCOMPA  
TC2_GNDTCA  
TC1_JGAINB  
TC1_5MVB  
TC1_JCOMPB  
TC1_KCOMPB  
TC1_GNDTCB  
TC2_JGAINB  
TC2_5MVB  
JP5  
1
R9  
8
7
5
C9  
0.1  
MICROFIT-20  
J
K
2
3
10K  
4
TC PROGRAMMING SOCKET  
5
R-  
6
7
8
LT1025  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
* GROUNDED THERMOCOUPLES ARE EXPECTED BY DEFAULT  
No extra connections are necessary for grounded thermocouples  
* FOR UNGROUNDED THERMOCOUPLES  
short TCX_GNDTCA to TCX_GNDTCB  
* FOR K THERMOCOUPLE:  
1) Install CN0000156 for thermocouple connector  
2) Short only TCX_KCOMPA to TCX_KCOMPB on TC Programming Plug  
4) Leave TCX_JCOMPX pins of the plug unconnected  
* FOR J THERMOCOUPLE:  
1) Install CN0000155 for thermocouple connector  
2) Short TCX_JCOMPA to TCXJCOMPB on TC Programming Plug  
3) Short TCX_JGAINA to TCX_JGAINB on TC Programming Plug  
4) Leave TCX_KCOMPX pins of the plug unconnected  
* DEFAULT OUTPUT IS 10 mV PER DEG C  
-15V  
TC2_JCOMPB  
TC2_KCOMPB  
TC2_GNDTCB  
R20  
3M  
TC2_KCOMPA  
TC2_JCOMPA  
THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR  
OMEGA  
J16  
F6  
ZR4  
1/8 AMP FUSE  
-
2
U7B  
4.7V  
1
+
R24  
TC2_GNDTCA  
5
F5  
7
6.81K  
1/8 AMP FUSE  
R18  
6
ZR6  
3V  
R22  
ZR5  
R16  
TC2_GND  
10K  
J16A  
+15V  
10K  
R26  
14.3K  
R8  
20K  
OPA2277  
1k  
-
2
1
3V  
C15  
0.01  
+
C11  
0.01  
TC2_JGAINA  
TC2_JGAINB  
THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR  
HAMITHERM  
U10  
TC2_GND  
3
R28  
5K  
TOUT  
R14  
TC2_5MVA  
TC2_5MVB  
1M  
8
7
5
TC2_JCOMPB  
TC2_KCOMPB  
J
K
R12  
1M  
C14  
0.1  
R27  
10K  
R-  
LT1025  
Title  
Schem, M100E/M200E/M400E Relay PCB  
Size  
B
Number  
04524  
Revision  
D
Printed documents are uncontrolled  
3
3
Date:  
File:  
16-May-2007  
Sheet of  
N:\PCBMGR\04522cc\source\04522D.drdabwn By:  
6
1
2
3
4
5
Te  
Te  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
U2  
74HC154  
U6A  
J101A  
PC104  
23  
22  
21  
20  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
1
11  
A
B
C
D
Y0  
Y1  
Y2  
Y3  
Y4  
Y5  
Y6  
Y7  
Y8  
Y9  
Y10  
Y11  
Y12  
Y13  
Y14  
Y15  
DIGIO0  
OC  
CLK  
3
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
DIGIO1  
IOW  
J108  
GND  
A0  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A0  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A9  
A10  
A11  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
DO0  
DI6  
DI4  
DI2  
DI0  
DO6  
DO4  
DO2  
DO0  
DI7  
DI5  
DI3  
DI1  
DO7  
DO5  
DO3  
DO1  
DIGIO2  
DIGIO3  
DIGIO4  
TEMP  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
Q5  
Q6  
Q7  
Q8  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DO1  
DO2  
DO3  
DO4  
DO5  
DO6  
DO7  
DI0  
DI1  
DI2  
DI3  
DI4  
74HC32  
DACV  
VCC  
9
WRDAC  
VFPROG  
CHGAIN  
VFREAD  
10  
11  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
D
C
B
A
D
TP44  
J102  
TP2  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A8  
A9  
9
0X32C  
U7  
74HC574  
U8  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
74HC541  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
AEN  
VCC  
C38  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
18  
19  
1
19  
RN16  
47Kx8  
G1  
G2  
G1  
G2  
19 A12  
18 A13  
17 A14  
16 A15  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11 AEN  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0X32F  
IOR  
DI5  
DI6  
DI7  
VCC  
D0  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Y1  
Y2  
Y3  
Y4  
Y5  
Y6  
Y7  
Y8  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
R59  
47k, 5%  
U1  
74HC688  
ENAB2  
U4B 74HC74  
10  
11  
D0 12  
9
8
MICROFIT-16  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
PRE  
CLK  
D
Q
20  
19  
VCC  
P=Q  
Q
3
18  
5
16  
7
14  
9
12  
2
17  
4
15  
6
13  
8
11  
13  
B0  
B7  
B1  
B6  
B2  
B5  
B3  
B4  
A0  
A7  
A1  
A6  
A2  
A5  
A3  
A4  
CLR  
IOCHRDY  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
U51D  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
I2C_RESET  
U4A  
12  
13  
DS5  
11  
VCC  
TC1  
R24  
ADDR=0x360 (DEFAULT)  
ADDR = 0x320 (JP1 INSTALLED)  
4
3
2
5
6
1
2
PRE  
CLK  
D
Q
Q
2.2K, 5%  
D1  
TP56  
74HC08  
1
VCC  
X3  
1
VCC  
LED, RED, smt 1206  
CLR  
Pins 1&2 shorted on PCA  
JP7  
R4  
74HC74  
C39  
2.2K, 5%  
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic  
IOCHECK  
AEN  
C
1
2
3
R3  
2.2K, 5%  
1
JITO-2-DC5F-10OHM  
4
J107  
EN  
IOEN  
DGND  
SDA  
VCC  
SCL  
1
2
3
4
5
6
R38  
HEADER3-DEFAULTED-1  
R25  
IOW 1  
2
2.2K, 5%  
U10  
PCF8584  
10  
3
GND  
SYSCLK  
1
4
5
6
I2C_RESET  
CLK  
IACK  
INT  
A0  
RESET  
U51B  
NOT INSTALLED  
D[0..7]  
JP1  
2
4
5
INT  
A0  
20  
74HC32  
U50A  
VCC  
1
6
INLINE-6  
J106  
19  
IDC-HEADER  
U50B  
KBINT  
SDA  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
17  
16  
18  
74HC08  
CS  
RD  
WR  
IOR  
IOW  
3
2
I2C_DRV_RST  
SCL  
SDA  
VCC  
A12  
A13  
4
5
U5A 74HC74  
U50C  
6
9
4
3
2
1
5
6
PRE  
CLK  
D
Q
Q
8
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
7
8
9
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
SCL  
DB0  
DB1  
DB2  
DB3  
DB4  
DB5  
DB6  
DB7  
10  
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
DGND  
PC104CD  
74HC08  
U50D  
GND  
GND  
OSC  
CLR  
U6C  
74HC08  
J101B  
PC104  
9
MICROFIT-8  
A14  
A15  
12  
13  
8
VCC  
+5V  
VCC  
JP6  
11  
10  
10  
2
1
BALE  
TC  
VSS  
IDC-HEADER  
74HC32  
47k, 5%  
R5  
DACK2  
IRQ3  
IRQ4  
IRQ5  
IRQ6  
IRQ7  
SYSCLK  
REFRESH  
DRQ1  
DACK1  
DRQ3  
DACK3  
IOR  
IOW  
SMEMR  
SMEMW  
(KEY)  
+12V  
ENDXFR  
-12V  
DRQ2  
-5V  
IRQ9  
+5V  
U39  
B
U3  
74HC08  
LTC699CS8  
JP2  
1
2
4
2
INT  
shorted - sldr side  
1
C3  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
2
74AHC1GU04  
6
7
JP3  
IDC-HEADER  
WDI RESET  
I2C_RESET  
SHDN  
IOR  
IOW  
IOR  
IOW  
SHDN  
U5B  
PRE  
CLK  
D
10  
11  
12  
13  
9
8
U51A  
Q
Q
1
2
U6D  
IRQ12  
3
IOEN  
12  
13  
SHDAC  
+12V  
SHDAC  
IRQ10  
JP5  
11  
CLR  
JP4  
74HC74  
74HC08  
74HC32  
R61  
RESETDRV  
47k, 5%  
GND  
A
KBINT  
Title  
Notes:  
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702  
IDC-HEADER  
1) This schematic is for PCA #05702  
2) This schematic is for PCB 05701  
Size  
Orcad B  
Number  
Revision  
05703  
A
Date:  
File:  
17-Jun-2008  
Sheet  
1
of  
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
J1010  
DB9 FEMALE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RX1  
TX1  
RS-GND1  
RTS1  
CTS1  
DS2  
DS1  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
2
1
1
2
TV1  
TV ARRAY  
SMDA15LCC  
LED, GRN, smt 1206  
LED, RED, smt 1206  
R111  
TX for Com1  
RX for Com1  
-15V  
R11  
4.9K, 5%  
R12  
10k, 1%  
4.9K, 5%  
J1013  
J12  
DCE side of switch is side towards pin 1,  
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC  
RX0  
RTS0  
TX0  
CTS0  
RS-GND0  
RX1  
RTS1  
TX1  
CTS1  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
RXD  
TXD  
NC  
GND  
NC  
RTS  
CTS  
NC  
3
4
5
8
6
7
RS-GND1  
9
DB9M  
DTE  
10  
12  
TV ARRAY  
11  
VCC  
TV2  
SMDA15LCC  
R2  
2.2K, 5%  
R13  
R14  
R1  
INLINE-12  
SW1001  
SW PUSHBUTTON-4PDT  
VCC  
2.2K, 5%  
NOT INSTALLED  
NOT INSTALLED  
R10  
DS4  
DS3  
1
NOT INSTALLED  
2
1
LED, GRN, smt 1206  
TX for Com2  
2
LED, RED, smt 1206  
RX for Com2  
MT6  
MT7  
MT8  
MT9  
MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE  
MOUNTING HOLE  
TP13 TP14  
TP15 TP16 TP17 TP18  
VCC  
+12V +12VRET +15V  
-15V  
MT1  
MT2  
MT3  
MT4  
MT5  
MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE  
MOUNTING HOLE  
MOUNTING HOLE  
J15  
8
7
1
4
6
3
2
5
9
10  
+12V  
AUX DC  POWER IN  
+12RET  
DGND  
+15V  
VCC  
-15V  
AGND  
+5V  
U51C  
9
8
AGND  
EGND  
CHASGND  
10  
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM  
D1  
C1  
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM  
+
+
C2  
74HC08  
MOLEX-10  
MBRS340CT  
D9  
D1, D9 & R35 must be  
within 1" of J15  
MBRS340CT  
R35  
NOT INSTALLED  
Title  
Size  
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702  
Number  
Revision  
05703  
A
Orcad B  
Date:  
File:  
17-Jun-2008  
Sheet  
2
of  
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
C6  
ISOLATED 0-20MA OPTIONAL BOARDS  
ANALOG VOLTAGE & CURRENT OUTPUTS  
+15V  
U29A  
TP21  
C7  
C15  
10000 pF  
C20  
10000 pF  
-15V  
+15V  
10000 pF  
C21  
FE BEAD  
10000 pF  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
J19  
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
L1  
DAC RANGE &2 OFFSET PROGRAM  
40K  
R15  
3
2
+
-
L2  
L3  
L4  
OP-AMP, PRECISION DUAL  
1
VREF  
J1020  
IDC-8  
J21  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
C
B
A
0
0G  
1
1G  
2
2G  
3
3G  
D
C
B
A
C4  
C5  
C13  
C19  
R63  
10k, 1%  
TV3  
TV4  
TV ARRAY  
10000 pF 10000 pF  
10000 pF 10000 pF  
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
TV ARRAY  
2
4
6
8
1
C8  
SMDA15LCC  
TC2  
3
5
7
C53  
L5  
L6  
L7  
-15V  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
U20B  
U29B  
DACV  
DACV  
4
6
5
IDC-8  
J23  
SMDA15LCC  
L15  
U30  
74HC574  
+
-
TERMBLOCK-8  
IOW  
IOW  
5
6
FE BEAD  
1
11  
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
J22  
OC  
CLK  
2
4
6
8
1
1
2
74HC32  
3
5
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
DAC3V  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19 CSDACA  
18 CSRANGE1  
17 CSDACB  
16 CSRANGE2  
15  
14  
13  
12  
3
4
5
6
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
Q5  
Q6  
Q7  
Q8  
CSDACA  
IDC-8  
OP-AMP, PRECISION DUAL  
CSDACB  
7
8
9
10  
DAC0  
DAC1  
DAC2  
DAC3  
U20C  
9
8
CLK  
10  
WRDAC  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
C9  
MICROFIT-10  
74HC32  
+15V 0.15 uF, ceramic  
C10  
D[0..7]  
+15V  
U36A  
TP26  
U35A  
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD  
TP27  
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD  
3
+
1
-
3
2
+
-
1
2
R16  
DAC0V  
DAC0V  
DUAL DAC A1  
DUAL DAC A2  
U34  
DAC 2  
U31  
DOUT VOA  
GND  
VCC  
CLK VOB  
U32  
U33  
DOUT VOA  
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
23  
22  
24  
21  
R17  
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
23  
22  
24  
21  
18.7K  
A1  
W1  
B1  
AGND1  
A1  
W1  
B1  
CSDACA  
D0  
CSDACB  
CS  
DIN  
CS  
DIN  
GND  
VCC  
DAC2V  
TP28  
D0  
CLK  
TP29  
AGND1  
CLK  
18.7K  
CLK VOB  
-15V  
R18  
10k, 1%  
SOCKET U31  
DAC, 12 BIT  
11  
12  
14  
13  
DAC, 12 BIT  
D0  
11  
12  
14  
13  
+15V  
U36B  
CS  
CS  
D0  
CLK  
R19  
C11  
SDI  
CLK  
SDO  
SOCKET U33  
SDI  
CLK  
SDO  
+15V  
CLK  
U35B  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
10k, 1%  
C12  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
5
6
+
-
7
4
2
1
5
6
+
-
-15V  
4
2
1
W2  
B2  
AGND2  
W2  
B2  
AGND2  
7
3
3
A2  
A2  
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD  
15  
10  
15  
10  
-15V  
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD  
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD  
RS  
RS  
SHDN  
SHDAC  
SHDAC  
SHDN  
-15V  
+15V  
U36C  
16  
9
16  
9
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
C14  
C16  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
DAC3  
10  
9
+
-
0.15 uF, ceramic  
C17  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
8
DGND  
DGND  
DAC3V  
+15V  
R20  
C18  
U35C  
DAC1  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
18.7K  
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD  
19  
18  
20  
17  
10  
9
+
-
19  
18  
20  
17  
-15V  
A3  
A4  
W3  
B3  
AGND3  
A3  
A4  
W3  
B3  
AGND3  
8
DAC1V  
DAC1V  
TP32  
TP33  
R21  
10k, 1%  
R22  
+15V  
U36D  
8
6
5
18.7K  
-15V  
8
6
5
12  
13  
+
-
W4  
B4  
AGND4  
W4  
B4  
AGND4  
14  
7
7
R23  
10k, 1%  
+15V  
U35D  
POT, DIGITAL  
POT, DIGITAL  
D7  
-15V  
12  
13  
+
-
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD  
14  
MBRS340CT  
D8  
Title  
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702  
-15V  
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD  
Size  
Number  
05703  
Revision  
MBRS340CT  
D7 and D8  
Must be located  
A
Orcad B  
within 1" of U32 & U34  
Date:  
File:  
17-Jun-2008  
Sheet 3 of  
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4D\SraowunrcBe\y0:5701a.DDB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
+15V  
RN14  
100Kx8  
+15V  
-15V+15V  
R43  
100  
ANALOG INPUTS  
J109  
CH7  
CH6  
CH4  
CH3  
CH2  
CH1  
C55  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RN15  
100Kx8  
C40  
C41  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
0.15 uF, ceramic  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
+
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM  
U52  
R45 induces an  
offset in analog  
signal to give a  
'live 0' for sensors  
with 0 or slightly  
negative output  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
11  
10  
9
28  
1
3
+
-
OP-AMP, PRECISION  
6
IN 1  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 4  
IN 5  
IN 6  
IN 7  
IN 8  
OUT  
+VSS  
-VSS  
GND  
C42  
TC7  
0.15 uF, ceramic 2  
1M, 1%, 1206 CHIP  
R45  
10  
11  
12  
27  
12  
U53  
CH6  
C43  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
-15V  
VCC  
CH7  
CH8  
MICROFIT-12  
C44  
U54  
CH9  
13  
2
3
18  
14  
15  
16  
17  
IN 9  
VREF  
NC  
NC  
ENB  
A3  
A2  
A1  
A0  
C45  
+
IN 10  
IN 11  
IN 12  
IN 13  
IN 14  
IN 15  
IN 16  
CH11  
CH12  
CH13  
CH14  
C46  
.022 uF, 50V  
4
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
OP OUT  
OP-  
OP+  
5VI  
10VI  
COMP+  
COMP-  
AGND  
GND  
8
7
6
5
0.15 uF, ceramic  
5
6
7
8
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM  
VCC  
U55  
VCC  
R46  
1.1K, 5%  
DG444DY  
J110  
3
14  
11  
6
1
16  
9
2
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
IN1  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
D1  
FOUT  
CH14  
CH13  
CH12  
CH11  
CH9  
4
15  
10  
7
12  
4
5
13  
100 R47  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D2  
D3  
D4  
VCC  
-VS  
VCC  
TP3  
AGND  
1
R48 200  
AN MUX  
+15V  
AD652KP  
CH8  
X2  
C54  
GND  
+VS  
8
JITO-2-DCA5AE-4.8MHZ  
C47  
U56  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic  
C48  
8
1
2
3
4
10  
11  
12  
NC  
7
NC  
VIN  
+15V  
C49  
1
4
NC  
6
TP48  
VCC  
1
5
X1  
VOUT NR  
R47 and R48 reduce the gain  
for analog inputs by 1%, so  
that we can read slightly above  
full scale, to prevent overflow  
of ADC reading  
PLACE 100  
OHM  
RESISTOR AS  
CLOS AS  
POSSIBLE TO  
X1 AND X2  
5
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic  
-15V  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
R49  
100  
MB100H-4.8MHZ  
TRIM GND  
MICROFIT-12  
TEMPMUX  
TP1  
1
VOLTAGE REF  
VREF  
-15V  
VREF  
D6  
D2  
D5  
100  
R9  
RN17  
100Kx8  
VCC  
DACMUX  
TC6  
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM  
TP49  
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10  
5
C50  
TP57  
+
U58  
74HC574  
1
11  
SHDN  
OE  
CLK  
TC8  
D4  
D3  
D7  
7
8
9
39  
DB4  
TIE  
38  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
VCC  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
Q5  
Q6  
Q7  
Q8  
C
RDMBYTE  
DB3  
TIE  
37  
VCC  
TIE  
36  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
GND  
DB7  
TIE  
TIE  
DB0  
TDI  
TMS  
TCK  
TIE  
35  
U57  
FREQ  
C51  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
U59A  
TIE  
TIE  
1
CHGAIN  
IOW  
3
D0  
VCCIO  
GND  
TDO  
2
SEL60  
Xilinx CPLD  
C52  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
SEL60  
74HC32  
SEL60  
D[0..7]  
TP50  
U60  
74HC574  
TP51  
TP52  
TP53  
TP54  
TP55  
U59B  
4
5
1
VFPROG  
OE  
11  
6
D1  
CLK  
IOW  
IOR  
D0  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
SA  
SB  
SC  
START  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
Q5  
Q6  
Q7  
Q8  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
74HC32  
VFREAD  
MSB  
MID  
LSB  
Title  
Size  
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702  
Number  
Revision  
Orcad B  
05703  
A
Date:  
File:  
17-Jun-2008  
Sheet  
4
of  
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
+15V  
+5VANA  
U23  
IN  
ON/OFF NC  
1
3
5
4
BYPASS CAPS  
MUST BE WITHIN  
1/2" OF THE  
REGULATOR  
INPUT/OUTPUT  
PINS  
OUT  
C60  
+
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM  
LP2981IM5  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
C29  
1 uF  
D[0..7]  
+5VANA  
VCC +15V  
XT1  
U48  
MAX382CWN  
J27  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14  
15  
4
3
2
17  
16  
18  
1
THERMISTER  
TEMPMUX  
OUT  
+VSS  
GND  
V-  
ENB  
A0  
A1  
A2  
RS  
WR  
5
6
7
8
13  
12  
11  
10  
THERMISTER1  
IN 1  
THERMISTER2  
THERMISTER3  
THERMISTER4  
THERMISTER5  
THERMISTER6  
THERMISTER7  
THERMISTER8  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 4  
IN 5  
IN 6  
IN 7  
IN 8  
D0  
D1  
D2  
9
THERMISTER6  
THERMISTER5  
SHDN  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
U59D  
12  
TEMP  
IOW  
11  
MICROFIT-14  
RN20  
10Kx9, 2%  
13  
74HC32  
+15V-15V  
RN18  
1Kx4  
8
U49  
2
15  
10  
7
12  
4
3
1
2
3
4
DAC0V  
DACMUX  
C36 0.15 uF, ceramic  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
VCC  
-VS  
GND  
+VS  
S1  
S2  
S3  
DAC0V  
DAC1V  
DAC2V  
DAC3V  
14  
11  
6
1
16  
9
7
6
5
DAC1V  
DAC2V  
DAC3V  
10K  
R34  
S4  
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
VCC  
IN1  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
DAC0  
DAC1  
DAC2  
DAC3  
5
13  
8
C37  
0.15 uF, ceramic  
10Kx4  
RN21  
DG444DY  
Title  
Size  
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702  
Number  
Revision  
05703  
A
Orcad B  
Date:  
File:  
17-Jun-2008  
Sheet  
5
of  
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
CONTROL INPUTS  
VCC  
RN3  
510x8  
TP7  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
RN2  
15Kx8  
U11  
U12  
PS2702-4  
1
19  
G1  
G2  
DIGIO0  
IOR  
J1004  
1
16  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
Y1  
Y2  
Y3  
Y4  
Y5  
Y6  
Y7  
Y8  
L19  
L20  
L21  
2
3
15  
14  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
5
13  
12  
EXTERNAL  
CONTROL  
IN  
A
FE BEAD  
L8  
L22  
6
7
11  
10  
74HC541  
D[0..7]  
8
9
10  
L9  
TERMBLOCK-10  
10000 pF  
EXT_+5V_OUT  
10000 pF  
R27 R28 R29  
100 100 100  
R31 R32 R33  
100 100 100  
R26  
100  
R30  
100  
330 pF, 50V  
330 pF, 50V  
330 pF, 50V  
U13  
PS2702-4  
330 pF, 50V  
1
16  
L23  
2
3
15  
14  
L24  
L26  
4
5
13  
12  
L25  
FE BEAD  
Place these termination resistors at the end of each data  
line. Each data line  
should be laid out as a daisy-chain, the signal passing  
from one IC to the next.  
6
7
11  
10  
8
9
10000 pF  
VCC  
10000 pF  
RN4  
15Kx8  
U14  
RN1  
1
19  
G1  
G2  
DIGIO4  
IOR  
510x4  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
18 D0  
17 D1  
16 D2  
15 D3  
14 D4  
13 D5  
12 D6  
11 D7  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
Y1  
Y2  
Y3  
Y4  
Y5  
Y6  
Y7  
Y8  
U15  
PS2702-4  
J1006  
1
16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EXTERNAL  
CONTROL  
L28  
L29  
L30  
L27  
2
3
15  
14  
IN  
B
D[0..7]  
4
5
13  
12  
74HC541  
L11  
FE BEAD  
10000 pF  
L10  
6
7
11  
10  
10  
TERMBLOCK-10  
8
9
EXT_+5V_OUT  
Title  
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702  
Size  
Number  
Revision  
10000 pF  
05703  
A
Orcad B  
Date:  
File:  
17-Jun-2008  
Sheet  
6
of  
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCC  
DIGITAL  OUTPUTS  
RN10  
510x8  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
C80  
U22  
PS2702-4  
16  
C82  
10000 pF  
1
TP19  
C79  
C81  
SHDN  
2
3
15  
14  
SHDN  
U24  
74HC574  
10000 pF  
U6B  
4
1
11  
4
5
13  
12  
DIGIO2  
OE  
CLK  
L43  
6
IOW  
5
L44  
L45  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19  
6
7
11  
10  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
Q1  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
74HC32  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
Q5  
Q6  
Q7  
Q8  
FE BEAD  
L46  
8
1
9
J1017  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A STATUS OUTPUTS  
U25  
PS2702-4  
16  
L48  
L49  
L50  
D[0..7]  
2
3
15  
14  
FE BEAD  
9
L47  
4
5
13  
12  
10  
11  
12  
6
7
11  
10  
C84  
C86  
TERMBLOCK-12  
10000 pF  
L12  
8
9
C83  
C85  
FE BEAD  
C26  
C27  
10000 pF  
RESETTABLE FUSE, 0.3A, 60V  
F1  
VCC  
D6  
L13  
FE BEAD  
EXT_+5V_OUT  
VCC  
RN12  
510x8  
DIODE, SCHOTTKY  
U26  
PS2702-4  
16  
1
SHDN  
2
3
15  
14  
U27  
74HC574  
U20D  
C90  
12  
1
11  
4
5
13  
12  
DIGIO3  
OE  
CLK  
L52  
L53  
L54  
10000 pF  
11  
C88  
B STATUS OUTPUTS  
IOW 13  
IOW  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
6
7
11  
10  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
Q5  
Q6  
Q7  
Q8  
C89 10000 pF  
74HC32  
C87  
J1018  
FE BEAD  
L51  
8
1
9
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
U28  
PS2702-4  
16  
L56  
L57  
L58  
2
3
15  
14  
FE BEAD  
L55  
RET  
10  
GND  
4
5
13  
12  
C28  
TERMBLOCK-10  
C92  
C94  
10000 pF  
6
7
11  
10  
C93  
C91  
L14  
10000 pF  
8
9
Title  
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702  
Size  
Number  
Revision  
05703  
A
Orcad B  
Date:  
File:  
17-Jun-2008  
Sheet  
7
of  
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCC  
DIGITAL  OUTPUTS  
RN7  
510x8  
U16  
PS2702-4  
16  
SHDN  
1
SHDN  
U17  
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
10000 pF  
74HC574  
2
3
15  
14  
U59C  
9
1
11  
DIGIO0  
OE  
CLK  
8
10000 pF  
IOW 10  
4
5
13  
12  
L32  
L33  
L34  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
Q5  
Q6  
Q7  
Q8  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
74HC32  
6
7
11  
10  
FE BEAD  
L31  
8
9
J1008  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
U18  
PS2702-4  
16  
D[0..7]  
L36  
L37  
L38  
CONTROL OUTPUTS  
1
2
3
15  
14  
FE BEAD  
9
L35  
4
5
13  
12  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
6
7
11  
10  
CO_EXT_RET  
8
9
TERMBLOCK-14  
FE BEAD  
L59  
VCC  
EXTERNAL CONNECTOR  
SOLDER SIDE  
10000 pF  
RN5  
510x8  
10000 pF  
10000 pF  
U19  
PS2702-4  
16  
1
SHDN  
2
3
15  
14  
U21  
74HC574  
U20A  
1
2
1
11  
4
5
13  
12  
DIGIO4  
IOW  
OE  
CLK  
L40  
L41  
L42  
3
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
6
7
11  
10  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
Q5  
Q6  
Q7  
Q8  
74HC32  
FE BEAD  
L39  
8
9
10000 pF  
10000 pF  
+12V  
D2  
RELAY SPDT  
K1  
2
5
4
1
3
DIODE, SCHOTTKY  
Q1  
J1009  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
R58  
+12V  
D3  
RELAY SPDT  
2.2K, 5%  
K2  
EXTERNAL  
REAR PANEL  
ALARM OUTPUTS  
SO2222  
DIODE, SCHOTTKY  
Q2  
2
5
4
1
3
RELAY SPDT  
K3  
R6  
2
5
4
1
3
+12V  
10  
11  
12  
D4  
2.2K, 5%  
SO2222  
DIODE, SCHOTTKY  
Q3  
TERMBLOCK-12  
+12V  
D5  
RELAY SPDT  
K4  
2
5
4
1
3
R7  
2.2K, 5%  
SO2222  
DIODE, SCHOTTKY  
Q4  
R8  
Title  
Size  
2.2K, 5%  
SO2222  
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702  
+12VRET  
Number  
Revision  
05703  
A
Orcad B  
Date:  
File:  
17-Jun-2008  
Sheet  
8
of  
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Toastmaster Electric Heater 7500 H UA13T User Manual
Toshiba Blu ray Player BDX3300 User Manual
Toshiba Fax Machine TF471 User Manual
TP Link Security Camera TL WDN3800 User Manual
Transition Networks Cable Box CPSVT26XX User Manual
Tricity Bendix Freezer TB 112 FF User Manual
Tripp Lite Network Cables P501 100 User Manual
Turtle Beach Computer Hardware DSS User Manual
Unified Brands Ventilation Hood Premier Ventilation User Manual
Viking InterWorks Network Card MAC OS User Manual